JP2018023718A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of checking a specific ratio value.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 comprises: a main control board 80 capable of executing control processing related to progress of a game; a main board case 400A covering the main control board 80; and a base display device 300 which is attached to a rear-side case 401A of the main board case 400A. A game controlling microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 can display in the base display device 300 a base (normal base, time-shortening base, and big winning base) which is a ratio of a total winning ball number obtained by a player with respect to the number of game balls shot by the player. The base display device 300 can be moved to a mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80, by rotation of the rear-side case 401A.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 80

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  Some pachinko gaming machines are provided with various winning ports such as a starting port (entrance ball opening), a big winning port (special winning port), and a normal winning port, as described in Patent Document 1, for example. The start opening includes a fixed start opening that does not change the ease of entering a ball and a variable start opening that can change the ease of entering. The variable start port is an easy entry of a game ball based on the operation of an ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric Chu). The big prize opening is opened based on the operation of the special electric accessory.

  If a game ball that flows down enters each winning opening, the player can obtain a prize ball. Note that the number of prize balls that a player obtains when one game ball enters the game is predetermined for each prize opening. On the other hand, when a game ball that flows down enters a different outlet from each prize opening, the player cannot acquire a prize ball.

JP2015-208555A

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine, it is inspected beforehand whether or not the base is in a normal range, whether or not the output rate exceeds a specified value, and the like. The base (specific ratio value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of shot balls that is the number of game balls that the player has launched. The participation rate (specific rate value) is the number of prize balls (community action award balls) obtained based on the action of an accessory (ordinary electric accessory, special electric accessory, etc.) out of the total prize balls won by the player. Number). If the base and the outage rate are out of the normal range, it becomes a pachinko gaming machine that can give an excessive profit or disadvantage to the player. Therefore, an appropriate pachinko machine is installed in the hall by inspecting the base and the exit rate in advance.

  However, in recent years, some pachinko machines installed in halls have been altered improperly, or have a specific ratio value such as base or outage rate that is abnormal due to a malfunction or failure. there were. In other words, there was a pachinko machine that was significantly different from the values when the specific ratio values such as the base and the exit rate were inspected. Therefore, as a countermeasure described above, there is a demand for a pachinko gaming machine that can confirm a specific ratio value.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the subject is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming a specific ratio value.

  The present invention takes the following means in order to solve the above problems. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding component names and expressions in [Mode for carrying out the invention], which will be described later, the reference numerals used in the drawings, and the like are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to this supplementary note.

<A> The gaming machine of the present invention is
In a gaming machine that controls to a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A specific indicator capable of displaying a specific ratio value which is a ratio of the total number of winning balls and the specific number of game balls acquired by the player;
And a moving mechanism that enables the specific indicator to move relative to a predetermined member.
<B> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The predetermined member is a main control board capable of executing a control process related to the progress of the game,
The main control board includes a mounting surface for mounting a predetermined integrated circuit,
The specific indicator may be movable with respect to the mounting surface by the moving mechanism unit.
<C> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The specific indicator may be movable by the moving mechanism unit from a facing position facing the integrated circuit to a non-facing position not facing the integrated circuit.
<D> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The non-facing position may be a position where the specific indicator does not face the entire mounting surface.
<E> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The moving mechanism unit may be configured to allow the specific indicator to slide in a direction intersecting with an orthogonal axis of the mounting surface.
<F> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The moving mechanism unit may be configured to make the specific display movable so that a region of the mounting surface facing the specific display becomes small.
<G> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The specific indicator can display, as the specific ratio value, a base which is a ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player with respect to the number of shot balls which is the number of game balls fired by the player. And good.
<H> Here, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
The specific indicator may be capable of displaying, as the specific ratio value, a payout ratio that is a ratio of the number of winning balls acquired based on the operation of the accessory out of the total number of winning balls acquired by the player. .

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to confirm the specific ratio value.

1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the state in which the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine is opened. It is a front view of the game board with which the gaming machine is provided. It is a front view which shows the 2nd big prize apparatus with which the same gaming machine is provided in detail. It is an enlarged front view of the game display with which the gaming machine is provided. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main control board and main board case with which the gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the same gaming machine. It is an enlarged front view of a rate indicator provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of the same gaming machine. (A) is a prize ball number counter addition table, (B) is a figure showing each memory | storage part and each memory area of game RAM, (C) is a figure which shows each counter and each memory area of special memory. It is. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each light emission part with which a game display is provided. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each lighting part for ratios with which a rate indicator is provided. It is a figure which shows the wiring around the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control with a game display. It is a figure which shows the case where the lighting state of each game light emission part or the lighting state of each lighting ratio lighting part is cleared. It is a figure which shows the case where a 1st light emission area | region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light emission part of a 1st light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd light emission area | region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light emission part of a 2nd light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 3rd light emission area | region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light emission part of a 3rd light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 4th light emission area | region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light emission part of a 4th light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control by an output rate indicator. It is a figure which shows the case where a 1st lighting area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part lighting part of a 1st lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd lighting area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting ratio lighting part of a 2nd lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 3rd lighting area | region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting ratio lighting part of a 3rd lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 4th lighting area | region is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output ratios of a 4th lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 1st comparative example. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control of a 2nd comparative example. It is a hit type determination table. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a reach determination table, (C) is an ordinary symbol determination table, and (D) is an ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an open pattern determination table of electric Chu. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a power-on process. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of an input process. It is a flowchart of a prize ball number counter addition process. It is a flowchart of an exit rate calculation process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of special electric equipment processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of an output process. It is a flowchart of a game display process. It is a flowchart of an exit rate display process. It is a flowchart of an exit rate display process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the clear image displayed on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the out port sensor of the modification of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the electrical connection state of the out port sensor of the modification of a 1st form. (A) is a figure which shows the prize ball number counter addition table of the modification of 1st form, (B) is a figure which shows each memory | storage part and each memory area of game RAM of the modification of 1st form. (C) is a figure which shows each counter and each storage area of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the input process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the counter addition process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base calculation process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the output process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display process of the modification of a 1st form. It is a flowchart of the base display process of the modification of a 1st form. (A) is a figure which shows each memory | storage part, each memory area, and each counter of the game RAM of a 2nd form, (B) is a figure which shows each memory area of the special memory of a 2nd form. It is a flowchart of the power-on process of a 2nd form. It is a flowchart of prize ball number counter addition processing of the 2nd form. It is a flowchart of the power-off monitoring process of a 2nd form. (A) is a figure which shows each memory | storage part, each memory area, and each counter of the game RAM of the modification of 2nd form, (B) shows each memory area of the special memory of the modification of 2nd form. FIG. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power-on of the modification of a 2nd form. It is a figure which shows the state which the back side case of a 3rd form rotates. It is a figure showing the state where the back side case of the 1st modification of the 3rd form rotates. It is a figure which shows the state which the back side case of the 2nd modification of a 3rd form slides. It is a figure which shows the state which the back side case of the 3rd modification of a 3rd form slides. It is a figure which shows the state from which the external output rate display apparatus of a 4th form can be attached or detached with the connector of a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure by the side of the main control board of a 4th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 4th form. It is a flowchart of the input process of a 4th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of a 4th form. It is a flowchart of the input process of the modification of a 4th form. In a 5th form, it is a figure which shows the display mode when not displaying a rate with a rate indicator. It is a flowchart of the output process of a 5th form. It is a flowchart of the display change process of a 5th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of the modification of a 5th form. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board of 6th form, and special LED. It is a flowchart of the output process of a 6th form. It is a flowchart of the special LED process of a 6th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of the modification of a 6th form. It is a flowchart of the special LED process of the modification of a 6th form. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board of 7th form, and special LED. It is a simple abnormality determination table of a 7th form. It is a flowchart of the input process of a 7th form. It is a flowchart of the simple abnormality determination process of a 7th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of a 7th form. It is a flowchart of the special LED process of a 7th form. (A) is a normal simple abnormality determination table of a modification of the seventh embodiment, (B) is a short time simple abnormality determination table of the modification of the seventh embodiment, and (C) is a jackpot of the modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a simple abnormality determination table. It is a flowchart of the input processing of the modification of a 7th form. It is a flowchart of the simple abnormality determination process of the modification of a 7th form. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of an 8th form. (A) is an 8th prize ball number counter addition table, (B) is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation frequency counter and each storage area of the special memory of 8th form, (C) is payout of 8th form It is a figure which shows each counter of the special memory. It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for game control of an 8th form performs. It is a flowchart of the payout side timer interruption process of an 8th form. It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for payout control of an 8th form performs. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of a game machine in the 1st modification of an 8th form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of the 1st modification of an 8th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit with which the payout control board of the 1st modification of an 8th form is provided. (A) is a figure which shows the prize ball number counter addition table of the 2nd modification of an 8th form, (B) shows each storage area and fluctuation frequency counter of the special memory of the 2nd modification of an 8th form. It is a figure, (C) is a figure which shows each counter of the special memory for payout of the 2nd modification of an 8th form. It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for game control of the 2nd modification of an 8th form performs. It is a flowchart of the input process which the microcomputer for payout control of the 2nd modification of an 8th form performs. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 9th form. It is a flowchart of the game display process of a 9th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 9th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 9th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 10th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 10th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 10th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 11th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of an 11th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of an 11th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 12th form. It is a figure which shows the switch circuit part of a 12th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of a 12th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 12th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 12th form. It is a figure which shows the game display of a 13th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 13th form. It is a flowchart of the rate display process of a 13th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of 14th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of the modification of 14th form. It is a figure which shows the game display of another modification. It is a prize ball number counter addition table of the other modification. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the game machine of another modification. It is a figure which shows the state which the rate indicator of another modification slides. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power-on of the other modification. It is a figure which shows game RAM of the other modification. It is a figure which shows the discharge port sensor of another modification.

1. Configuration of Game Machine A pachinko game machine according to each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction approaching a player facing the pachinko gaming machine, and the backward direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 (see FIG. 3) attached in the gaming machine frame 50. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine frame 50 constitutes an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and includes an outer frame 51, an inner frame 52, and a front frame (glass door frame) 53. The outer frame (base frame portion) 51 is a vertical rectangular frame that forms the outline of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The inner frame (holding frame portion) 52 is a vertical rectangular frame that is disposed inside the outer frame 51 and to which the game board 2 is attached. The front frame (front door portion) 53 is disposed on the front side of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52 and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 2.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 50 includes a hinge portion 54 on the left end side. By this hinge portion 54, the front frame 53 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52, and the inner frame 52 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the front frame 53, respectively. It has become. An opening 53a is formed at the center of the front frame 53, and a transparent glass plate (window) 55 is attached to the opening 53a so that a player can visually recognize a game area 3 described later.

  The inner frame 52 of the gaming machine frame 50 is provided with a frame opening detection switch (frame opening detecting means) 50a capable of detecting that the inner frame 52 is opened (rotated) with respect to the outer frame 51. ing. Therefore, when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame opening detection switch 50a is in a state where the opening of the inner frame 52 is not detected (OFF state). On the other hand, when the inner frame 52 is open with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame open detection switch 50a is in a state of detecting the opening of the inner frame 52 (ON state), and outputs a detection signal. Hereinafter, when the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 50 is described, the detection of the opening of the inner frame 52 is meant.

  The frame opening switch (frame opening detecting means) 50a of this embodiment is a photo switch (photo sensor). However, a switch that detects physical contact by a push button and a spring, a pressure switch (pressure sensor), a proximity switch (proximity sensor), or the like may be used and can be changed as appropriate. The frame opening detection means is not limited to detecting the opening of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51. For example, the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 may be detected, and both the opening of the inner frame 52 to the outer frame 51 and the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 can be detected. Also good. Further, the arrangement position of the frame opening detection means is not limited to the inner frame 52 but may be the outer frame 51 or the front frame 53, and can be changed as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower right side of the front frame 53, there is provided a handle (launching operation means) 60 for firing a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle. Further, on the lower side of the front frame 53, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 for storing game balls (game media) and an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61 are provided. 62 is provided. In addition, an effect button 63 and a select button (cross key) 64 that can be operated by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses are provided around the hitting ball supply tray 61. The select button 64 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button.

  Next, the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 flow down are surrounded by rail members 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board lamp 5 (see FIG. 10). The game board 2 includes a plate-like member (game board) arranged on the front side and a back unit (unit for attaching various control boards, image display device 7, harness, etc. described later) arranged on the rear side. It is integrated.

  In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails that change in the direction in which the game balls flow down are projected. Further, an image display device 7 which is a liquid crystal display device is arranged near the center of the game area 3. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, variable display (variable display) of effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with variable display (variable display) of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. There is an effect symbol display area for performing. Note that the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is referred to as an effect symbol variation effect. The effect design variation effect may be referred to as “decoration design variation effect” or simply “change effect”.

  The effect symbol display area includes, for example, three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. A left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, a middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Each of the effect symbols is made up of a plurality of symbols representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The image display device 7 includes a first special symbol displayed on a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, according to a combination of left, middle, and right effect symbols. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. Further, if it is out of place, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as “637”. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery with the image display device 7 rather than with the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, as a variation display mode of the effect design, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction.

  The image display device 7 displays, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game, a demonstration effect for the customer waiting (customer waiting effect), and the like in addition to the effect symbol variation effect using the effect symbol as described above. To display. In the effect design variation effect, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are displayed in addition to effect symbols such as numbers.

  In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold image 9A in accordance with the number of stored first special figure drawings to be described later, and the number of second special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold image 9B. The number of stored first special figure hold displayed on a later-described first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 5) or the second special figure hold indicator 43b (see FIG. 5) by displaying the production hold images 9A and 9B. 5)), the number of stored second special figure holds can be easily shown to the player.

  A center decorative body 10 is disposed near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A stage portion 11 capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface to a first starting port 20 described later is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. Further, the center decorative body 10 is provided with a movable panel body 15 that can move in front of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the initial state, the movable panel 15 is in a retracted position where it is hardly visible from the front as shown in FIG. The panel movable body 15 can be moved from the retracted position to an exposed position (not shown) that hides most of the display screen 7a. The movable board 15 is driven by a movable board drive motor 15a (see FIG. 10).

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 is a first starting opening (also referred to as a first starting opening, a first starting winning opening, or a fixed entering opening) where the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. A first start winning device (also referred to as first pitching means or fixed pitching means) 19 having 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (a jackpot lottery, that is, determination of acquisition of a jackpot random number or the like).

  Also, in the game area 3, below the first start opening 20, an ordinary variable winning device (so-called electric outlet) having a second start opening (also referred to as a second starting opening, a second starting winning opening, or a variable entering opening) 21 is provided. Chu) 22 is provided. The electric chew 22 is also referred to as variable pitching means, second pitching means, or second start winning device. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is an ordinary electric accessory that includes an opening / closing member (movable member) 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the opening / closing member 23. The opening / closing member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (see FIG. 9). When the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21, and when it is in the closed state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21. That is, the 2nd starting opening 21 is a starting opening from which the ease of entering a game ball can change. In addition, if the electric chew makes it easier to enter the second starting port when the opening / closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, It may not be impossible to enter the mouth.

  Further, on the right side of the first start port 20 in the game area 3, a first grand prize device (a first special prize means or a first special variable prize prize) provided with a first grand prize port (first special prize port) 30 is provided. (Also referred to as a device) 31 is provided. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member (first special prize opening opening / closing member) 32 that takes an open state and a closed state, and a special electric accessory that opens and closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. It is. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 9). The first grand prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

  Further, above the first grand prize opening 30 in the game area 3, a second big prize device (second special prize means or second special variable prize prize) having a second big prize opening (second special prize opening) 35 is provided. 36) is also provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (second special prize opening opening / closing member) 37 that takes an open state and a closed state, and a special electric accessory that opens and closes the second grand prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. It is. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 9). The second grand prize opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a specific area (V area) 39 through which the game ball that has passed through the second grand prize winning opening 35 can pass inside the second big prize winning device 36 and A non-specific region 70 is formed. In the second grand prize-winning device 36, a second grand prize port sensor 35a for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second big prize port 35 is disposed upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70. . The specific area 39 is provided with a specific area sensor 39 a that detects the passage of a game ball to the specific area 39. Further, the non-specific area 70 is provided with a non-specific area sensor 70 a that detects the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 70. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes a distribution member 71 that distributes the game balls that have passed through the second grand prize winning opening 35 to either the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 70, and a distribution member solenoid that drives the distribution member 71. 73.

  FIG. 4A shows when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized. As shown in FIG. 4A, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in a first state (passage allowable state) that allows the game ball to pass to the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing through the second big prize opening sensor 35a. This game ball route is referred to as a first route.

  FIG. 4B shows a state in which the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized. As shown in FIG. 4B, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the distribution member 71 is in the second state (passage prevention state) that prevents the game ball from passing to the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35 passes through the non-specific area 70 after passing through the second big prize opening sensor 35a. This game ball route is referred to as a second route.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 is an opportunity to shift to a high probability state described later. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability changing operation port. On the other hand, the non-specific region 70 is not a probability variation operating port. Further, the first large winning device 31 is not provided with a specific area as a probability changing operation port. That is, only non-specific areas are provided.

  Returning to FIG. 3, a gate (also referred to as a passing port or a passing area) 28 through which a game ball can pass is provided above the first grand prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers the execution of a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (per random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22. Further, an ordinary winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3. Further, at the bottom of the game area 3, there is provided an out port 16 through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 3 but have not won any winning holes are discharged out of the game area 3.

  In this way, the game area 3 in which various winning holes are arranged, the left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and the right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. There is. The method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called left-handed. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is referred to as a right hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing left-handed is referred to as a first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing right-handed. This is referred to as a second flow path R2.

  A first start port 20, a normal winning port 27, and an out port 16 are provided on the first flow path R1. The player can aim to win the first starting port 20 or the normal winning port 27 by driving a game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1. Note that the gate 28 is not disposed on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the electric chew 22 is not released when left-handed.

  On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second grand prize winning device 36, a gate 28, a first grand prize winning device 31, an electric chew 22, and an out port 16 are provided. The player hits the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, and passes to the gate 28, and wins the second grand prize port 35, the first big prize port 30, and the second start port 21. Can be aimed.

  A game display 40 is disposed on the right side of the game board 2. The game display 40 displays game information based on control processing of a game control microcomputer 81 described later. As shown in FIG. 5, the game display device 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a for variably displaying the first special symbol and a second special symbol indicator 41b for variably displaying the second special symbol. ing. The first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight game light emitting units (LED elements) LA1 to LA8. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight game light emitting units (LED elements) LA9 to LA16.

  Further, the game display 40 has a normal symbol display 42 for variably displaying the normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold display for displaying the number of operations held (first special figure hold) of the first special symbol display 41a. Device 43a, second special symbol display unit 43b for displaying the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol hold) of the second special symbol display unit 41b, and operation reservation of the normal symbol display unit 42 (general drawing hold) And a general-purpose hold display unit 44 for displaying the stored number. The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA17 and LA18. The first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA19 and LA20. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA21 and LA22. The general-purpose hold indicator 44 includes two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA23 and LA24.

  Further, the game display 40 displays a right-handed display 45 for displaying that the player should be right-handed, a game state display 46 for displaying the current game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game. A round indicator 47 is included. The right-handed display 45 is composed of two game light emitting units (LED elements) LA25 and LA26. The game status indicator 46 is composed of three game light emitting units (LED elements) LA27 to LA29. The round indicator 47 includes three game light emitting units (LED elements) LA30 to LA32. A total of 32 game light emitting portions LA1 to LA32 in the game display device 40 are mounted on the game LED board 40a.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the first start port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the second start port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display 41. Further, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 43.

  In the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped to display a lottery (special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. Inform the results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the stop symbol and the variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (a special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped (that is, the type of the jackpot that has been won) A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed to open the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35). In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the jackpot game will be described later.

  Specifically, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b is a first special symbol or a second special symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery according to the light emission modes of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16. A symbol is displayed. For example, when a big win (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, LA6 emit light on the first special symbol display 41a. The jackpot symbol is displayed (see FIG. 16A). If the second special symbol is a lottery, the second special symbol display 41b displays the lost symbol emitted only by the game light emitting unit LA15 (see FIG. 16B). A mode in which all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display device 41a and all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display device 41b are not lighted as the lost symbols may be adopted. Note that the lost symbol is not a specific special symbol.

  Further, before the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, the first special symbol. In this embodiment, each of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 emits light so that light repeatedly flows on the display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. In addition, if the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are not stopped (light emission display in a specific mode), the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are simultaneously displayed. You can flash anything.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters (wins) the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various random number values such as a jackpot random number (input) The ball information) is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 (see FIG. 9). Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure storage unit 85a (see FIG. 9) as the first special figure holding, and the ball enters the second starting port 21. For example, the second special figure hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 85b (see FIG. 9). There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure hold can be variably displayed. Digesting a special figure hold means that a jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and a special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variation display of the special symbol Even when a ball is entered during execution or during a jackpot game, the right to win a jackpot on the pitch can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold display 43. For example, when the number of special figure hold (first special figure hold or second special figure hold) is “1”, the first special figure hold indicator 43a or the second special figure hold indicator 43b When only the light emitting units LA19 and LA21 are turned on (lighted) and the number of special figure hold is “2”, only the light emitting units LA20 and LA22 on the left side are turned on and the number of special figure hold is In the case of “3”, the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, LA21, LA22 are blinked, and when the number of special figure hold is “4”, the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, LA21 and LA22 are caused to emit light. In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation is digested in preference to the first special figure reservation. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as an opportunity. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying the normal symbol (variation display) and then displaying the stop symbol. A normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (a normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by a normal symbol lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), the second start port 21 is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the current gaming state. An auxiliary game to be performed is performed. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the light emission mode of the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18. For example, when the lottery result is a win, the normal winning symbol emitted by the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 is displayed. When the lottery result is a loss, the normal lose symbol emitted only by the lower game light emitting unit LA17 is displayed (see FIG. 16C). A mode in which the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 do not emit light may be employed as the normal lose pattern. Note that the normal lose symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 emit light alternately. The variation display mode may be anything such as flashing all at once as long as the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode).

  Also, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the ordinary figure storage unit 86 (see FIG. 9). It is temporarily stored as a general hold. There is an upper limit to the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the saved map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

  The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the ordinary symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game Even if there is a case, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. For example, in the case where the number of hold for general use is “1”, the general hold display 44 emits light (lights up) only the right game light emitting unit LA23, and the number of hold for general use is “2”. In the case where only the left game light-emitting unit LA24 is lit and the number of usual-game holds is “3”, the two game-use light-emitting units LA23 and LA24 are blinked, In the case of “4”, the two game light emitting units LA23 and LA24 are caused to emit light.

  Further, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, a jackpot game is executed, or the gaming state can be controlled to a high probability state or a short time state as will be described later. When a jackpot game is being executed (a jackpot game state), or in a high probability state or a short-time state, the right-handed display 45 is displayed on the right side because the player who is right-handed rather than left-handed has more benefits. It is displayed that it should be hit. For example, the right-handed indicator 45 causes the two game light emitting units LA25 and LA26 to emit light as a display of a state to be right-handed (see FIG. 16D). In the normal gaming state, the player who is left-handed more than the right-handed player is likely to receive more privileges. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 45 does not cause the two game light emitting units LA25 and LA26 to emit light. It has become.

  Further, the current game state is displayed on the game state display 46. For example, in the high probability state, the game state indicator 46 causes the two game light emitting units LA27 and LA28 to emit light. In the short time state, the game state indicator 46 causes the game light emitting unit LA29 to emit light. Therefore, in the high probability state and the short time state, the three game light emitting units LA27, LA28, LA29 emit light, and in the normal probability state and the short time state, only the game light emitting unit LA29 emits light. In the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time-short state), the game state indicator 46 does not light the three game light emitting units LA27, LA28, LA29 (see FIG. 16D).

  The number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed on the round display 47. However, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set to only 16R (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the round indicator 47 causes the three game light emitting units LA30, LA31, LA32 to emit light as a display of the number of rounds (16R) during the execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 16D).

  By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is characterized in that it can display the outage rate. The payout rate (specific rate value) is the number of bonuses (ordinary electric bonuses, special electric bonuses) out of the total number of winning balls that the player has acquired from the time the power is turned on (predetermined starting point). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the action (number of winning action action balls, number of specific game balls). However, there are a bonus rate and a continuous bonus rate among the payout rates, and there are a bonus bonus and a bonus bonus for the bonuses in the bonus act bonus ball. The prize ratio is a ratio of the number of prize balls (number of prize prize balls) acquired based on the operation of all the prizes including the ordinary electric bonus and the special electric bonus among the total prize balls. The consecutive combination ratio is a ratio of the number of award balls (the number of consecutive combination award balls) acquired based on continuously operating the special electric combination among the total number of award balls. That is to say, the consecutive combination ratio is a ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based only on the execution of the jackpot game out of the total number of prize balls. The total number of winning balls is a value (denominator measurement value) that becomes the denominator before calculating the payout rate. This is the value (molecule measurement value) that becomes the numerator before computing.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine is designed to be tested for 10 hours before it is installed in the hall. At this time, it is inspected that the combination ratio does not exceed 70% (70%) and that the continuous combination ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). That is, it is inspected whether the output rate is within the normal range. If the bonus rate exceeds 70%, or if the continuous bonus rate exceeds 60%, it is a pachinko gaming machine that can give an excessive privilege to the player. Thus, pachinko machines determined to be within the normal range by inspection are installed in the hall. However, in the past, pachinko machines that have been illegally remodeled after being inspected, or have a ratio of over 70% due to breakdown or malfunction, or a continuous ratio of over 60%. The possibility of becoming could not be completely denied.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a rate indicator (specific indicator) that can display the rate of withdrawal so that it can be determined whether an unauthorized modification has been made or a failure or malfunction has occurred. ) 300. The output rate indicator (display means) 300 is integrally attached to the rear surface side of the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. The main control board (main board) 80, which will be described in detail later, is a board on which a game control microcomputer 81 capable of executing a control process related to the progress of the game is mounted. By the control process of the game control microcomputer 81, the payout rate display 300 displays the payout rate (combination rate or continuous feature rate). Thus, the rate display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the rate display is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 for the following reason.

  The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) is an inspection target for proper operation in the test, unlike a sub-control board 90 and the like which will be described later. In other words, it is ensured that the control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 is appropriate. Therefore, if the game control microcomputer 81 displays the turnout rate, the display of the turnout rate is highly reliable. In short, in order to prevent the rate display itself from being performed illegally, the rate display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 to cause the game control microcomputer 81 to display the rate. . As a result, it is possible for the person who confirms the rate of return to grasp the rate of return as reliable information.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 80 is accommodated in the main board case 400. The main board case 400 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so as not to obstruct the view of electronic components (such as integrated circuits) on the main control board 80. The main board case 400 has a structure that is divided into two parts by a rear case 401 arranged on the rear side and a front case 402 on the front side. A connector CN2 is attached above the rear surface side of the main control board 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a connector CN1 is attached to the game LED board 40a of the game display 40. Therefore, the connector attached to one end of the harness (not shown) is connected to the connector CN1 of the gaming LED board 40a, and the connector attached to the other end of the harness (not shown) is the connector CN2 of the main control board 80. Connected to. Thereby, the game control microcomputer 81 can output a signal based on the control process to the game display device 40 via the harness. As a result, the game display 40 displays the game information by causing each of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 and the main board case 400 are arranged on the back side of the gaming machine frame 50. Specifically, the main board case 400 that houses the main control board 80 is detachably attached to the rear side (not shown) of the game board 2 inside the gaming machine frame 50. Therefore, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the rate indicator 300 are displayed. Is impossible to see. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (the inner frame 52 is opened with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the rate indicator 300 are visually recognized through the transparent rear case 401. Is possible. Thus, in order to confirm the payout rate displayed on the payout rate indicator 300, the game machine frame 50 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the output rate indicator 300 is a so-called quadruple 7-segment, and includes a total of 32 light-emitting (light-emitting) portions, similar to the game indicator 40 (see FIG. 5). . Specifically, the rate indicator 300 includes a first lighting region 310, a second lighting region 320, a third lighting region 330, and a fourth lighting region 340 in order from left to right. The four lighting areas (display areas) 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting ratio lighting sections (LED elements) LB1 so as to represent numbers from “0” to “9”. LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32. In addition, since 4 x 7 segments are distributed products in the market, the output rate indicator 300 can be configured at low cost by using 4 x 7 segments.

  Next, display on the rate display 300 will be described. In the 1st lighting area 310, the number of the tenth place in the case of displaying an output rate (composition ratio or a continuous combination ratio) in percent (percentage) can be displayed. For example, when the exit rate is 60%, in the first lighting region 310, the exit rate lighting parts LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lit and "6" is displayed (FIG. 26 ( A)). In the second lighting region 320, a number of the first place can be displayed when the output rate is displayed as a percentage (percentage). For example, when the exit rate is 60%, in the second lighting region 320, the exit rate lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, and LB14 are lit and "0" is displayed (FIG. 26 ( B)).

  In the 3rd lighting area | region 330, it shows whether the output rate currently displayed on the 1st lighting area | region 310 and the 2nd lighting area | region 320 is an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio. In this embodiment, “1” is displayed in the third lighting region 330 when the accessory ratio is displayed. That is, if the ratio lighting units LB18 and LB19 are lit, the accessory ratio is displayed. On the other hand, when the continuous character ratio is displayed, “2” is displayed in the third lighting region 330 (see FIG. 26C). That is, if the lighting ratio lighting parts LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 are lit, the continuous character ratio is displayed.

  In the fourth lighting region 340, the output rate displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 indicates whether it is an effective value or a reference value. Here, the meaning of the effective value or the reference value will be described. As mentioned above, the winning rate is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of the role out of the total number of prize balls acquired from the time the power is turned on to the present time, but when the power is turned on If the time when the game is played by the player is short, there is a possibility that the turnout rate has not converged. Therefore, a person who confirms the output rate cannot make a correct determination unless the output rate as a value converged to some extent is displayed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the first condition that the total number of award balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on to the current time is “10000” (predetermined number of balls) or a special condition from when the power is turned on until the current time A value (effective value) in which the output rate has converged to some extent if either condition of the second condition that the number of changes in which the symbol change display is executed is “3000” (predetermined number of revolutions) or more is satisfied. It is considered to be. On the other hand, if neither the first condition nor the second condition described above is satisfied, the output rate is regarded as a value that does not converge to some extent (reference value).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the output rate as an effective value is displayed, “1” (a specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 (see FIG. 26D). That is, if the lighting ratio lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit, either the first condition or the second condition described above is satisfied. Therefore, if “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, it is possible to correctly determine the output rate as an effective value converged to some extent. On the other hand, when displaying the output rate as a reference value, “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340. That is, if the lighting ratio lighting portions LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, and LB30 are lit, neither the first condition nor the second condition described above is satisfied. Therefore, if “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, it is possible to confirm the output rate as a reference value that may not yet converge.

2. Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related to a main control board (game control board) 80 that performs control related to game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and effects executed as the game progresses. A sub-control board (production control board) 90 that performs control, a payout control board 110 that performs control related to payout of game balls, and the like are provided. Each of the main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 corresponds to a main board that can influence the game result. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 constitute a main control part, and the sub control board 90 constitutes a sub control part together with an image control board 100, a sub drive board 107, and a sound control board 106 described later. Note that the sub-control unit includes at least the sub-control board 90 and can control the game effect using the effect means (the image display device 7, the speaker 67, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the panel movable body 15, etc.). That's fine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a power supply board 150. A power switch 155 is connected to the power board 150, and turning on / off the power is switched by an ON / OFF operation of the power switch 155. Note that the power supply means 24 VAC power supplied from the power plug 160 to the power supply board 150 in a state where the power plug 160 shown in FIG. 7 is connected to the outlet of the game hall (hall). The power supply board (power-on means) 150 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter, and includes electric power (DC37V, DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) and necessary power can be supplied to other devices via these boards.

  The power supply substrate 150 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 151. The backup power supply circuit (backup power supply means) 151 is provided with a RAM 84 and a special memory 89 on the main control board 80, which will be described later, when the necessary power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to power interruption such as business termination or power failure. Power can be supplied to the RAM 94 of the control board 90. Therefore, information (stored contents) stored in the RAM 84 and the special memory 89 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. The RAM (volatile memory) 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are volatile storage means (DRAM). The backup power supply circuit 151 includes a large capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. A backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 and the special memory 89 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80, or a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided on the sub control board 90.

  The power supply board 150 is mounted with a RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 for causing the CPU 82 to clear information stored in the RAM 84 with respect to the main control board 80. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various other control boards including the power supply board 150 are also arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ing. For this reason, the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 cannot be operated unless the employee of the hall that can open the gaming machine frame 50 or the person who confirms (inspects) the exit rate. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 are operation means that are virtually impossible to be operated by the player. A signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is output from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 80. The arrangement location of the RAM clear switch 152 is not limited to the power supply board 150 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the main control board 80 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 (main control means) includes a ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the ROM 83, and a RAM 84 that stores processing information of the CPU 82 as a work memory. In addition, an I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 87 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and a special memory 89 used as a work memory for calculating the output rate are included.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 84 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and a general figure reservation storage unit 86. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 84 stores a first game data storage area, a second game data storage area, and a third game data for storing data information for displaying game information on the game display 40. A storage area and a fourth game data storage area are provided. The ROM 83 may be externally attached.

  The special memory (special storage means) 89 is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the exit rate. As shown in FIG. 11C, the special memory 89 has a counter for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball counter, a prize prize ball counter, a continuous prize prize counter, and a variation counter. And an accessory ratio storage area, a continuous accessory ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area.

  The 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of prize balls that the player has acquired, one by one, and resets to a value of “0” when 100 balls are counted (when the count reaches 100 or more). It has come to be. The actual total prize ball counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the counter for 100 balls. That is, the actual total prize ball counter is a counter that increases by one every time the number of prize balls reaches 100. Thus, the 100-ball counter and the actual total prize-ball counter measure the total number of prize balls paid out from the time when the power is turned on to the present time as one unit per hundred balls (measurement for one hundred balls). Means).

  The prize winning ball counter measures the total number of prize balls that are paid out based on the operation of the accessory from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The consecutive prize ball number counter measures the total number of prize balls paid out based only on the execution of the jackpot game from the time when the power is turned on. The variation counter measures the number of variations in which the special symbol variation display has been executed from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The accessory ratio storage area stores the calculated accessory ratio. The continuous character ratio storage area stores the calculated continuous character ratio. The checksum storage area stores a checksum value calculated with respect to the stored contents of the special memory 89 as will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the payout rate display 300 displays the payout rate (the ratio of the accessory items or the continuous accessory rate) as a two-digit integer (for example, “60”) as a percentage (percent). For example, if the output rate is displayed using a decimal point such as “0.60”, the integer “0” and the decimal point must be displayed, and the number of digits to be displayed increases. Also, the reason for not displaying more than three digits is that it is almost unnecessary for a person who confirms the outage rate to grasp a detailed value of more than three digits.

  By the way, when trying to calculate the ratio of an accessory as a percentage value, in general, after dividing by the total number of winning balls, which is a value measured in units of one ball with respect to the number of winning balls, it is multiplied by 100 A way to do this is considered. However, the division process requires a program that checks whether it is divided by "0" or whether there is a shift in the digit position, and in the four arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) This is a heavy processing. In particular, in the case of the above-described method, since the value of the total number of winning balls as a denominator is larger than the value of the number of winning award balls as a numerator, adjustment of the digit position at the time of division becomes complicated in software. In other words, in the division process in terms of software, the subtraction process is repeated, and if the denominator value is larger than the numerator value, the process becomes complicated by adjusting the digit position.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of winning balls is measured as one hundred balls using a counter for 100 balls and an actual total winning ball counter. As a result, when calculating the ratio of the functions as a percentage value, the value of the actual total prize ball counter (the total number of prize balls is one hundred) with respect to the value of the prize prize ball counter (number of bonus prize balls). (Value measured as one unit). As a result, the value of the denominator becomes smaller than the value of the numerator, and software processing at the time of division can be simplified. Further, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when 100 balls are counted, a counter for 100 balls (first counter) that can be reset to a value of “0” and an actual value that can be counted by counting 100 balls by the counter for 100 balls. A total prize ball counter (second counter) is used. For this reason, it is possible to perform a calculation process of the output rate with a 2-byte value. That is, a counter used in a normal pachinko gaming machine can count a 2-byte value (a value from 0 to 65535). However, if you try to count the total number of winning balls in units of one ball using only one counter, the total number of winning balls will exceed 65535 as the game progresses and can be handled as a 2-byte value. Disappear. Therefore, by using two counters, a counter for 100 balls and an actual total prize ball counter, it is possible to substantially count up to 6553500 which is 100 times the total prize ball number. As a result, it is possible to handle a 2-byte value as it is when calculating the output rate. In this way, it is possible to calculate the payout rate in a unit (2 bytes) that is easy for the game control microcomputer 81 to handle, and it is possible to prevent the calculation process from becoming complicated.

  In the above description, when calculating an accessory ratio, it has been explained that the value of the bonus prize counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball counter. Is simply divided by the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter with respect to the value of the number of consecutive winning award balls. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve the same operational effects as those described above, and the same description is omitted. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the calculated accessory ratio as a percentage value in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89, and stores the calculated consecutive accessory ratio as a percentage value in the special actor 89. It is to be stored in the area.

  Here, in this embodiment, the information stored in the special memory 89 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on, unlike the information stored in the RAM 84. That is, the information stored in the special memory 89 is not basically deleted after the power is first turned on for the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the payout rate (combination rate ratio or continuous component ratio) calculated in the present embodiment is the number of winning prizes in the total number of prize balls since the power is first turned on for the pachinko gaming machine 1. This means the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of prizes for winning a feature, the number of prizes for consecutive prizes). The reason why the special memory 89 is provided separately from the existing RAM 84 and the stored contents of the special memory 89 are not erased is based on the following reason.

  As described above, until the turnout rate has converged to some extent (effective value), the game is sufficiently performed by the player, and the total number of winning prizes and the number of winning prizes for winning the action are large. Need to be. However, for example, even if one day elapses, it is sufficiently possible that the number of fluctuations is less than 3000 revolutions and the total number of winning balls is less than 10,000. In this case, information (total number of winning balls, number of winning winning balls, number of consecutive winning winning balls, number of fluctuations, etc.) for calculating the winning rate by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on the next day is obtained. If cleared, there is a possibility that the effective rate cannot be calculated forever. Therefore, in this embodiment, the output rate as an effective value can be calculated by not erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89 even when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on. In particular, since the information stored in the special memory 89 is not basically erased, the longer the game period is, for example, one month or longer, the higher the exit rate as a more converged value. It is possible to calculate.

  The special memory 89 of this embodiment is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot retain the stored contents when power is not supplied. However, as described above, when a power outage such as a business end or a power failure occurs, power (backup power supply) can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 of the power supply board 150 to the special memory 89. Therefore, if the power is cut off for about several days, the stored contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased.

  Returning to the description of the electrical configuration on the main control board 80 side shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, a drive circuit 200 is provided on the main control board 80. The drive circuit 200 is a circuit for displaying game information on the game display 40 on the basis of a signal (data information) output from the game control microcomputer 81, and at the rate display 300 Is a circuit for displaying. The configuration of the drive circuit 200 will be described in detail later.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big prize opening sensor 30a, a second big prize opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and a non-specification. An area sensor 70a and a normal winning opening sensor 27a are connected. Further, a frame open detection switch 50 a is connected to the main control board 80, and a detection signal from the frame open detection switch 50 a can be input to the game control microcomputer 81.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball won in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball won in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball won in the second big prize opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27 a is provided in each of the normal winning openings 27 and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big prize opening solenoid 33, the second big prize opening solenoid 38, and the distribution member solenoid 73 are connected. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the opening / closing member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. The distribution member solenoid 73 is for driving the distribution member 71 of the second big winning device 36.

  Further, the main control board 80 has a game display 40 (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b, normal symbol display 42, first special figure hold display 43a, second special figure hold display. A device 43b, a general-purpose hold display device 44, a right-handed display device 45, a game state display device 46, and a round display device 47) are connected. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring.

  On the payout control board 110, a ball lending device 120, a ball lending device 130 and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and lending a ball based on information such as an inserted prepaid card are possible. And the launching device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 7, the payout control board 110 is disposed below the main control board 80 and is surrounded by a payout board case 500 made of a transparent synthetic resin.

  The payout control board (main board) 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 116 capable of executing control processing related to payout of game balls in accordance with a program. The payout control microcomputer (payout control means) 116 includes a ROM 118 that stores a program for controlling payout, a RAM 119 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 117 that executes a program stored in the ROM 118, and an input / output of data and signals. An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 109 is included. The ROM 118 may be externally attached.

  Based on a signal (prize ball command) from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control microcomputer 116 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize ball. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting, and a detection signal from the prize ball sensor 122 is output to the payout control board 110. In this embodiment, the number of winning balls by winning the normal winning opening 27 is eight. Further, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting port 20 is 3, and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting port 21 is 7. And the number of prize balls by winning to the 1st grand prize opening 30 is 15 balls, and the number of prize balls by winning to the 2nd big prize opening 35 is 15 balls (refer to Drawing 11 (A)). Note that the number of winning balls by winning at each winning opening is not limited to that described above, and can be changed as appropriate.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 116 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to pay out the lending. The paid out balls are detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting, and a detection signal from the ball rental sensor 132 is output to the payout control board 110. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. . Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, one game ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 91 that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer (effect control means) 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling effects as the game progresses, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the ROM 93. An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 97 for inputting / outputting data and signals is included. The ROM 93 may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the sub drive board 107. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to control the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80.

  The image control board 100 includes a ROM 103 that stores a program for controlling image display and the like, a RAM 104 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 102 that executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols (including production symbols), and background images. Is stored.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effect, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a frame lamp 66 (light emitting means provided in the gaming machine frame 50) or a board via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Lighting control of lamps such as the lamp 5 is performed. More specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp (LED element). The light emission of the lamp (LED element) is controlled. Note that data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control of the panel movable body 15 via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable board 15 and performs drive control of the movable board drive motor 15a according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data.

  The sub-control board 90 is connected with an effect button detection switch (SW) 63a and a select button detection switch 64a. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90. The select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection switch 64a to the sub-control board 90.

  9 and 10 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the last, and not only the substrates shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are provided. Except for the main control board 80, any one of the plurality of boards shown in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. Connection state of game display 40 and turnout display 300 and game control microcomputer 81 Next, connection states of game display 40 and turnout display 300 and game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. Based on First, based on FIG. 12, the electrical connection state of each game light emitting unit (light emitting unit) LA1 to LA32 of the game display device 40 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the connector CN1 provided in the game display device 40 is provided with 12 pins.

  The first common signal line A1, the second common signal line A2, the third common signal line A3, and the fourth common signal line A4 are connected to the first pin to the fourth pin of the connector CN1, respectively. From the fifth pin to the twelfth pin of the connector CN1, the first data signal line Aa, the second data signal line Ab, the third data signal line Ac, the fourth data signal line Ad, the fifth data signal line Ae, The 6 data signal lines Af, the seventh data signal line Ag, and the eighth data signal line Ah are connected to each other.

  In the following, the area where the game light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a are provided is referred to as a “first light emitting area 410”. In addition, an area in which the game light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b are provided is referred to as a “second light emitting area 420”. Further, the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 of the normal symbol display 42, the game light emitting units LA19 to LA22 of the special figure holding display 43, and the game light emitting units LA23 and LA24 of the general diagram holding display 44 are provided. The region where “and” are provided is referred to as a “third light emitting region 430”. Moreover, each light emission part LA25, LA26 of the right-handed display 45, each light emission part LA27-LA29 of the game state display 46, and each light emission part LA30-LA32 of the round display 47 are provided. This region is referred to as “fourth light emitting region 440”.

  The first common signal line A1 is connected to the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410. The second common signal line A2 is connected to the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420. The third common signal line A3 is connected to the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting region 430. The fourth common signal line A4 is connected to the game light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting region 440. The eight data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah include eight game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410 and the second light emitting region. Eight game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of 420, eight game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting region 430, and eight game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting region 440, respectively. linked.

  By the connection described above, the game control microcomputer 81 performs dynamic lighting control on the 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32. That is, if static lighting control is performed by connecting one (a total of 32) signal lines to 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32, the number of signal lines becomes too large. The game control microcomputer 81 which is an 8-bit microcomputer cannot perform lighting control. Therefore, the common signal lines A1, A2, A3, and A4 are connected to each of the light emitting areas 410, 420, 430, and 440 having eight game light emitting units to reduce the number of signal lines. . In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting areas that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410, 420, 430, and 440 are sequentially switched every 4 ms. Accordingly, it is possible to make the human eye appear to emit light simultaneously in the four light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 using the afterimage phenomenon.

  An outline of the dynamic lighting control will be described. For example, it is assumed that all 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 appear to emit light. In this case, first, the voltage of the first common signal line A1 is set to the “H” level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage), and the voltages of the other common signal lines A2, A3, A4 are set to the “L” level (lower limit). A voltage lower than the threshold voltage). Then, the voltages of the data signal lines Aa to Ah are set to the “H” level. Thereby, a drive current flows to all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410, and the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 emit light. Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the second common signal line A2 is set to “H” level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A3, A4 are set to “L” level. Then, the voltages of the data signal lines Aa to Ah are set to the “H” level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420, and the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 emit light.

  Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the third common signal line A3 is set to the “H” level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, and A4 are set to the “L” level. Then, the voltages of the data signal lines Aa to Ah are set to the “H” level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting region 430, and the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 emit light. Subsequently, after 4 ms, the voltage of the fourth common signal line A4 is set to the “H” level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, and A3 are set to the “L” level. Then, the voltages of the data signal lines Aa to Ah are set to the “H” level. As a result, the drive current flows through all the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting region 440, and the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 emit light. Thereafter, similarly, the light emission from the first light emitting region 410 to the fourth light emitting region 440 is repeated every 4 ms. In this way, at a certain moment, the game light emitting part emits light only in any one of the four light emitting areas 410 to 440, but all of the light emitting areas 410 to 440 in the human eye are present. The game light emitting portions LA1 to LA32 appear to emit light.

  Next, based on FIG. 13, an electrical connection state of the lighting ratio lighting sections (lighting sections) LB <b> 1 to LB <b> 32 of the power ratio indicator 300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the output ratio indicator 300 includes a first common signal line B1, a second common signal line B2, a third common signal line B3, a fourth common signal line B4, a first data signal line Ba, The second data signal line Bb, the third data signal line Bc, the fourth data signal line Bd, the fifth data signal line Be, the sixth data signal line Bf, the seventh data signal line Bg, and the eighth data signal line Bh are connected. ing. These signal lines B 1 to B 4 and Ba to Bh are provided on the main control board 80.

  Specifically, the first common signal line B <b> 1 is connected to each of the output rate lighting units LB <b> 1 to LB <b> 8 in the first lighting region 310. The second common signal line B <b> 2 is connected to each of the output rate lighting parts LB <b> 9 to LB <b> 16 in the second lighting region 320. The third common signal line B <b> 3 is connected to each of the output rate lighting parts LB <b> 17 to LB <b> 24 in the third lighting region 330. The fourth common signal line B <b> 4 is connected to each of the output rate lighting parts LB <b> 25 to LB <b> 32 in the fourth lighting region 340. Then, the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh include the eight light emitting portions LB1 to LB8 in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting. Eight rate lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the region 320, eight rate lighting units LB17 to LB24 in the third lighting region 330, and eight rate lighting units LB25 in the fourth lighting region 340 It is connected to LB32.

  With the connection described above, the game control microcomputer 81 performs dynamic lighting control on the 32 lighting ratio lighting units LB1 to LB32. The dynamic lighting control for the lighting ratio lighting units LB1 to LB32 is the same as the dynamic lighting control for the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the electrical connection state of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 81 includes 8-bit input / output terminals D0 to D7, an output terminal PO11, an output terminal PO12, an output terminal PO13, and many other terminals (for example, a backup power supply). Terminal VBB terminal). Input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the game control microcomputer 81 are connected to the bus line BL, and data information D [0], D [1], D [2], D [3], D [4], D [5], D [6], and D [7] can be input / output, respectively. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 can output 8-bit data information D [0] to D [7] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 to the bus line BL.

  Hereinafter, the data information D [0] to D [7] is referred to as data information D [0 ... 7], and the data information D [0] to D [3] is referred to as data information D [0 ... 3]. And For example, the parenthesis is omitted for the data information D [0] and is simply referred to as data information D0 as appropriate. In this embodiment, data information D0 = "1" means that an "H" level signal (data information D0) is output, and data information D0 = "0" means an "L" level signal. Assume that (data information D0) is output.

  The game control microcomputer 81 can output the select signal XCSE0 from the output terminal PO11, can output the select signal XCSE1 from the output terminal PO12, and can output the select signal XCSE10 from the output terminal PO13. The level of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 to be output is either “H” level (voltage higher than the upper threshold voltage) or “L” level (voltage lower than the lower threshold voltage) by the game control microcomputer 81. Is set.

  Next, the electrical connection state of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment (first embodiment) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, the drive circuit 200 includes a light emission selection circuit unit 210 and a light emission drive circuit unit 220 in order to display game information on the game display 40. The drive circuit 200 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the lighting selection circuit unit 230 is provided in order to display the output rate on the output rate indicator 300.

  The light emission selection circuit unit 210 is a circuit for selecting a light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 included in the game display device 40 based on the data information D [0... 3]. The light emission selection circuit unit 210 includes a flip-flop (IC1) and a transistor array (IC2).

  IC1 includes input terminals 1D to 8D for 8 bits, output terminals 1Q to 8Q for 8 bits, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC1, and data information D0, D1, D2, and D3 are respectively input thereto. Further, the input terminals 5D to 8D of the IC 1 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1, respectively. Further, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC 1 are not connected. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC1. A select signal XCSE0 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC1.

  The IC1 is a D-type flip-flop, and holds (latches) data information D [0... 3] input from the input terminals 1D to 4D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE0. Information D [0... 3] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q. For example, a general-purpose IC such as “SN74HC273N” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used as IC1.

  IC2 is a driver that can drive a large current with a very small input current, and includes 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have. Four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2. The input terminals IN5 to IN8 of IC2 are connected to the ground. In contrast, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC 2 include a first common signal line (first light-emitting common line) A1, a second common signal line (second light-emitting common line) A2, and a third common signal line A3. A fourth common signal line A4 is connected. These common signal lines A1 to A4 are connected from the 1st pin to the 4th pin of the connector CN2, and become the same transmission path as the common signal lines A1 to A4 (see FIG. 12) of the game display device 40 described above. The output terminals O5 to O8 of IC2 are not connected. For example, a general-purpose IC such as “M54562WP” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used as IC2.

  Based on the data information D [0. It is a circuit for making it possible. The light emission drive circuit unit 220 includes a flip-flop (IC3) and a transistor array (IC4).

  The IC 3 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. The bus lines BL are connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC 3, and data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, and D7 are respectively input thereto. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC3. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC3. The select signal XCSE1 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC3.

  The IC 3 is a D-type flip-flop, and holds (latches) data information D [0... 7] input from the input terminals 1D to 8D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE1, and holds the held data. Information D [0 ... 7] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 8Q. For example, a general-purpose IC such as “SN74HC273N” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used as the IC3.

  IC4 is a driver that can drive a large current with a very small input current, and includes 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (COM terminal, GND terminal). I have. Eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC4. On the other hand, the data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah are connected to the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC4. These data signal lines Aa to Ah are connected from the 5th pin to the 12th pin of the connector CN2 through the current limiting resistor RR, and the data signal lines Aa to Ah (see FIG. 12) of the game display device 40 described above. The same transmission path. For example, a general-purpose IC such as “M54585WP” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used as the IC4.

  The lighting selection circuit unit 230 is a circuit for selecting a lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 included in the output rate indicator 300 based on the data information D [0... 3]. The lighting selection circuit unit 230 includes a flip-flop (IC5) and a transistor array (IC6).

  The IC 5 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. A bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC 5, and data information D0, D1, D2, and D3 are respectively input thereto. The input terminals 5D to 8D of the IC 5 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC 5, respectively. Further, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC 5 are not connected. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC 5. The select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC5.

  The IC 5 is a D-type flip-flop, and holds (latches) data information D [0... 3] input from the input terminals 1D to 4D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE10. Information D [0... 3] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q. For example, a general-purpose IC such as “SN74HC273N” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used as the IC5.

  The IC 6 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a very small input current, and includes 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have. Four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC6. The input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC 6 are connected to the ground. In contrast, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC 6 include a first common signal line (first lighting common line) B1, a second common signal line (second lighting common line) B2, and a third common signal line B3. A fourth common signal line B4 is connected. These common signal lines B1 to B4 have the same transmission path as the common signal lines B1 to B4 (see FIG. 13) of the output rate indicator 300 described above. Further, the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC 6 are not connected. For example, a general-purpose IC such as “M54562WP” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be suitably used as the IC 6.

  In this embodiment, data signal lines (branched data lines) Ba to Bh are provided so as to branch from eight data signal lines (data lines) Aa to Ah arranged between the IC 4 and the connector CN2. ing. These data signal lines Ba to Bh have the same transmission path as the data signal lines Ba to Bh (see FIG. 13) of the output rate indicator 300 described above. Thus, the signals output from the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC 4 can be transmitted to the game display device 40 through the data signal lines Aa to Ah, and can also be transmitted to the output rate display device 300 through the data signal lines Ba to Bh. It has become.

4). Next, dynamic lighting control by the gaming control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the case where the dynamic lighting control is performed on the game display device 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 16A, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, and LA6 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting region 410. That is, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41a. Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, the game light emitting unit LA15 is caused to emit light in the second light emitting region 420. That is, the lost symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 41b. Next, as shown in FIG. 16C, the game light emitting portions LA17 and LA20 are caused to emit light in the third light emitting region 430. That is, the normal symbol display 42 displays the normal lose symbol, and the first special figure hold display 43a displays that there is one first special figure hold. Next, as shown in FIG. 16D, the game light emitting portions LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, LA32 are caused to emit light in the fourth light emitting region 440. That is, the right-handed display 45 displays that the right-handed state is to be set, and the round display 47 displays that the number of rounds is 16R.

  FIG. 17 shows a case where the light emission state of each game light emitting unit is once cleared. This does not reflect the light emission state of each game light emitting unit that was emitted in the previous light emission region (4 ms before) when light emitting each game light emitting unit in a certain light emitting region of the game display 40. It is to do. In this case, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00000000] as shown in FIG. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [00000000] is held by the IC 3 and the voltages of all the eight signal transmission lines S2 are set to the “L” level. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of all the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to the “L” level, and does not flow the drive current to the eight game light emitting units. In this way, the light emission state of each game light emitting unit is cleared. In addition, when clearing the lighting state of each lighting ratio lighting unit, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 is the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example described above, when the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the first light emitting area 410 as the light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440, the light emission in the fourth light emitting area 440 of the previous time (4 ms before). First, the light emission state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 18, data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [1000] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [HLLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [HLLL]. Thus, the first light emitting area 410 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [11001100]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [11001100] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLHHLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLHHLL] and allows a drive current to flow. Thus, in the first light emitting region 410, the game light emitting units LA1, LA2, LA5, LA6 emit light (see FIG. 16A).

  Thereafter (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 as the second light emitting area 420. In this case, the light emission state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emission state in the first light emission region 410 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 20, data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [0100] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 are set to [LHLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LHLL]. Thus, the second light emitting region 420 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [00001000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [00001000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LLLLHLLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [LLLLHLLLL] and allows a drive current to flow. Thus, the game light emitting unit LA15 emits light in the second light emitting region 420 (see FIG. 16B).

  Thereafter (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 to the third light emitting area 430. In this case, the light emission state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emission state in the second light emission region 420 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 22, data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [0010] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLHL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLHL]. Thus, the third light emitting region 430 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [10010000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [10010000] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLLLLLLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HLLHLLLL] and allows a drive current to flow. Thus, in the third light emitting region 430, the game light emitting units LA17 and LA20 emit light (see FIG. 16C).

  Thereafter (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 as the fourth light emitting area 440. In this case, the light emission state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the previous light emission state in the third light emission region 430 (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 24, data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [0001] is held by the IC1, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 are set to [LLLLH] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLLLH]. Thus, the fourth light emitting region 440 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [11000111]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [11000111] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLLHHH] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLLHHH], and causes the drive current to flow. Thus, in the fourth light emitting region 440, the game light emitting units LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, LA32 emit light (see FIG. 16D). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 performs light emission control in the first light emission area 410, light emission control in the second light emission area 420, light emission control in the third light emission area 430, and fourth light emission as described above every 4 ms. The light emission control in the area 440 is repeated.

  Next, a case where dynamic lighting control is performed on the output rate indicator 300 will be described based on FIGS. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), in the first lighting region 310, the lighting ratio lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lit. That is, “6” is displayed in the first lighting region 310. Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), in the second lighting region 320, the lighting units for output rate LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, LB14 are turned on. That is, “0” is displayed in the second lighting region 320. Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), in the third lighting region 330, the lighting units for output rate LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, LB23 are turned on. That is, “2” is displayed in the third lighting region 330. Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), in the fourth lighting region 340, the lighting ratio lighting parts LB26 and LB27 are turned on. That is, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340.

  In the example described above, when the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 as the first lighting area 310, the lighting in the fourth lighting area 340 of the previous time (4 ms before). First, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 27, data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [1000] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [HLLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [HLLL]. Thus, the first lighting region 310 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [10111110]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [10111110] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLHHHHHL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HLHHHHHL] and allows a drive current to flow. In this way, in the first lighting region 310, the lighting ratio lighting portions LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lit (see FIG. 26A).

  After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 as the second lighting area 320. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 29, data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [0100] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 sequentially become [LHLL] from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LHLL]. Thus, the second lighting region 320 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 30, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [11111100]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [11111100] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHHHHHLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHHHHHLL] and allows a drive current to flow. In this way, in the second lighting area 320, the lighting ratio lighting parts LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, LB14 are lit (see FIG. 26B).

  Thereafter (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 as the third lighting area 330. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 31, data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [0010] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLHL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLHL]. Thus, the third lighting region 330 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [11011010]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [11011010] is held by the IC3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLHHLHL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHLHHLHL] and allows a drive current to flow. In this way, in the third lighting region 330, the lighting ratio lighting parts LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, LB23 are lit (see FIG. 26C).

  Thereafter (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting area that can be lit among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 as the fourth lighting area 340. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 33, data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level. Thereby, the data information D [0001] is held by the IC 5, and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 are set to [LLLLH] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLLLH]. Thus, the fourth lighting region 340 is selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0-7] = D [01100000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level. As a result, the data information D [01100000] is held by the IC 3, and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LHHLLLLL] sequentially from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [LHHLLLLL], and causes the drive current to flow. Thus, in the fourth lighting area 340, the lighting ratio lighting parts LB26 and LB27 are lit (see FIG. 26D). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the lighting control in the first lighting region 310, the lighting control in the second lighting region 320, the lighting control in the third lighting region 330, and the fourth lighting as described above every 4 ms. The lighting control in the area 340 is repeated.

5. Technical Significance of the Drive Circuit 200 Next, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 of this embodiment (see FIG. 15) will be described. Therefore, a description will be given while comparing with the first comparative example and the second comparative example. As a first comparative example, a drive circuit 200X as shown in FIG. 35 can be considered. The drive circuit 200X selects a lighting region that can be lit among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output rate indicator 300, in addition to the existing circuits of the light emission selection circuit unit 210 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220 described above. A selection circuit unit 210X and a lighting drive circuit unit 220X that enables lighting of each of the eight lighting ratio lighting units in the selected lighting region are provided.

  The lighting selection circuit unit 210X has the same configuration as the light emission selection circuit unit 210, and includes a flip-flop (IC1X) and a transistor array (ICX2). The lighting drive circuit unit 220X has the same configuration as the light emission drive circuit unit 220, and includes a flip-flop (IC3X) and a transistor array (IC4X). The connection between the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting driving circuit unit 220X and the rate indicator 300 is exactly the same as the connection between the light emission selection circuit unit 210 and the light emission driving circuit unit 220 and the game display 40. . Therefore, in the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example, four ICs are newly added to the existing four ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display device 40 to emit light.

  By the way, the main control board 80 has a large technical restriction, and each manufacturer designs the main control board 80 so that the maximum performance can be exhibited within the technical restriction. Therefore, the main control board 80 does not have much room for newly arranging the output rate indicator 300 and its drive circuit. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a main control board that is larger than the existing main control board 80. However, the design change due to the size of the main control board affects the design of other control boards, resulting in enormous costs. It will take. Therefore, it is realistic to create a space by bringing the components on the existing main control board 80 together. However, if the parts are too dense, they are now vulnerable to noise. That is, if the parts of the main control board are too dense, the ground is reduced and the design is weak against noise. From the above viewpoint, it is desirable that as few new parts as possible be arranged on the main control board 80.

  Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, two ICs (lighting selection circuit units) with respect to the existing four ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display device 40 to emit light. 230) only. That is, by connecting the data signal lines Ba to Bh branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah to the output rate indicator 300, the lighting drive circuit unit 220X (see FIG. 35) as in the first comparative example is omitted. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of ICs to be added compared to the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, and to make it easier to mount on the main control board 80 from the viewpoint of the arrangement space. . Then, it is possible to prevent the parts on the main control board 80 from being too dense and to prevent the design from being weak against noise as much as possible.

  As a second comparative example, it is conceivable to perform dynamic lighting control as shown in FIG. In other words, in the second comparative example, first, as shown in FIG. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36B, light emission control in the second light emitting region 420 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36C, light emission control in the third light emitting region 430 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36D, light emission control in the fourth light emitting region 440 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36E, lighting control is performed in the first lighting region 310 of the output rate indicator 300. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36 (F), lighting control in the second lighting region 320 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36G, lighting control is performed in the third lighting region 330. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36H, lighting control is performed in the fourth lighting region 340. Thereafter, similarly, the dynamic lighting control shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to (H) is repeated. Therefore, in the second comparative example, if attention is paid to a certain light emitting area or lighting area, light emission control or lighting control is performed at a cycle of 32 ms.

  However, in the dynamic lighting control of the second comparative example, the cycle of the light emission control (lighting control) is long, and there is a possibility that the display on the game display device 40 and the display on the rate display device 300 blink. In other words, regardless of the situation in which the game display 40 continues to emit light, it appears to flash, or the situation indicator 300 continues to light up, There was a risk of appearing to flash.

  Therefore, the drive circuit 200 according to the present embodiment is configured such that light emission control or lighting control is performed at a period of 16 ms in a certain light emission region or lighting region. In other words, the light emission control in the light emission areas 410 to 440 of the game display device 40 and the light emission control in the light emission regions 310 to 340 of the rate display device 300 are alternatively executed, so that the same period ( 16ms), dynamic lighting control is enabled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display on the game display 40 and the display on the rate display 300 from blinking. In short, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment is that it is mounted on the main control board 80 while avoiding a longer period of dynamic lighting control with the game display device 40 or the output rate display device 300 than before. It is possible to realize space saving.

6). Description of jackpot etc. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are “hits” and “off” as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “missing”, the “design symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When winning a jackpot, the winning prize opening (the first winning prize opening 30 and the second winning prize opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is also called a special game.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot game is a multi-round game (unit open game), an opening before the first round game is started (also referred to as OP), and an ending after the last round game is completed (Also expressed as ED). Each round game starts with the end of OP or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 37, there are roughly two types in this embodiment. A specific jackpot and a regular jackpot. The specific jackpot is also called “V long jackpot”, and the normal jackpot is also called “V short jackpot”. The “V long jackpot” is a jackpot for operating the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 in a first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) in which a game ball can easily pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. . The “V short jackpot” is a jackpot for operating the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 in the second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. is there.

  More specifically, the “V long jackpot” that can be won in the lottery of the special figure 1 (the lottery of the first special symbol) is 29.5 seconds per 1R for the first big prize opening 30 from 1R to 8R. From 1R to 9R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R (final round), the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. It is a jackpot. That is, the total number of rounds per jackpot is 16R, but the actual number of rounds is 9R. The substantial number of rounds is the number of rounds in which game balls can win up to the maximum number of winnings per round (8 in this embodiment). In this V long jackpot, from 9R to 15R, the opening time of the grand prize opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. In addition, in 16R, passage to the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35 is easily possible. Further, when “special jackpot” is won by lottery of special figure 1, “special figure 1_specific symbol” is stopped and displayed on first special symbol display 41a.

  In addition, the “V long jackpot” that can be won in the drawing of the special figure 2 (the lottery of the second special symbol) opens the first big winning opening 30 from 1R to 15R for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, In 16R (final round), it is a big hit that opens the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. In other words, this jackpot has a substantial number of rounds of 16R. Of course, in 16R, passage to the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35 is easily possible. When “special jackpot” is won by lottery of special figure 2, “special figure 2_specific symbol” is stopped and displayed on second special symbol display 41b.

  On the other hand, the “V short jackpot” that can be won in the lottery shown in FIG. 1 opens the first big prize opening 30 for 29.5 seconds per 1R from 1R to 8R, and from 9R to 15R. The first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R (final round), the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R. That is, the total number of rounds per jackpot is 16R, but the actual number of rounds is 8R.

  At 16R in this V short jackpot, the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is extremely short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35. At 16R in the V short jackpot, not only the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is short, but also the opening timing of the second big prize opening 35 and the operation timing of the distribution member 71 (second state (FIG. 4 From the relationship with the first state (see (B)) to the first state (see FIG. 4 (A)), it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. When “normal bonus” is won by lottery of special figure 1, “special figure 1_normal symbol” is stopped and displayed on first special symbol display 41a.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 in the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is shifted to a high probability state to be described later. Therefore, when the above-mentioned V long jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the V short jackpot is won, the game ball cannot be passed to the specific area 39 while the jackpot game is being executed. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot game is a normal probability state described later. (Non-high probability state).

  However, even if it is controlled to the normal probability state, it is controlled to the short time state described later. In this case, the number of time reductions is set to 100. The number of time reductions is the upper limit number of executions of the special symbol variation display in the time reduction state.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is 50% for the V long jackpot (specific jackpot) and 50% for the V short jackpot (normal jackpot). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery shown in FIG. 2 are all V long jackpots (specific jackpots). Thus, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is won at the second start port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (the lottery in FIG. 1) that is performed when the game ball is won at the first start port 20. The big hit lottery (the lottery shown in FIG. 2) is set to be advantageous to the player.

  Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is won is performed based on the “big hit random number”, and the lottery for the type of winning jackpot is performed based on the “win type random number”. As shown in FIG. 38A, the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0-9. Note that random numbers acquired based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 include “reach random number” and “variation pattern random number” in addition to the big hit random number and the hit type random number.

  The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach is generated in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out of place. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols, and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed, It is a state (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”) that is a combination of the production symbols shown. It should be noted that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed so as to be slightly shaken in the display screen 7a, or may be displayed so as to repeat the enlargement and reduction. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-255.

  The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. In addition, the random number acquired based on the passage to the gate 28 includes a normal symbol random number (per hit random number) shown in FIG. The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

7). Description of the gaming state Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol display 42 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 each have a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function. A state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol display 41 is activated is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which it is not activated is referred to as a “normal probability state (non-high probability state)”. In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state. That is, jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table in which the value of the jackpot random number determined to be a jackpot is larger than the jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (see FIG. 39A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol display device 41 is activated, the probability that the display result of the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display device 41 (that is, the stop symbol) becomes a jackpot symbol as compared to when the special symbol display device 41 is not activated. Becomes higher.

  In addition, a state in which the function for reducing the variation time of the special symbol display 41 is in operation is referred to as “time-short state”, and a state in which the special symbol display 41 is not in operation is referred to as “non-time-short state”. In the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than in the non-short-time state. That is, the variation pattern is determined using a special variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 40). That is, when the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol display device 41 is activated, it is easy to select a short variation time as the variation time of the variable symbol special display, compared to when the special symbol display 41 is not activated. As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 may be activated at the same time, or only one of them may be activated. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in the time-short state and do not operate in the non-time-short state. Therefore, in the short time state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-short time state. In other words, a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using a normal symbol per-decision table having more normal symbol random numbers (per hit random) determined to be hit than a normal symbol per-decision table used in a non-time-saving state ( (See FIG. 39C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the display result of the variable symbol normal display by the normal symbol display 42 becomes the normal winning symbol is higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the short time state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-short time state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the time-short state (see FIG. 39D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the open time extension function of the electric chew 22 is activated. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than that in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the function of increasing the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened is activated.

  In the situation where the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension function and the number of times of opening increase function of the electric chew 22 are activated, compared to the case where these functions are not activated. Thus, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and game balls frequently win the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these functions are activated is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these functions are not activated is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control to support winning at the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is executed. Therefore, the high base state is also referred to as an electric support control state or a ball entry easy state. On the other hand, the low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state or a non-ball entering easy state.

  In the high base state, not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the operation of one or more of the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 22 Therefore, it is only necessary that the electric chew 22 be opened more easily than when the function is not activated. Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time reduction state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V long jackpot is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base if the game is passed to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. State. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate base state”. The high-accuracy base state is terminated when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V short jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., if the specific area 39 is not passed during the jackpot game). A low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low-accuracy base state”. The low-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-short state, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state may be referred to as a “normal game state”. A state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is being executed is referred to as a “special game state (a jackpot game state)”. Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “privilege gaming state”.

  In a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the right-hand strike enter the game ball into the right game area 3B (see FIG. 3). This is because the electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. . Therefore, the player makes a right turn to win the game ball at the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start prizes (win prizes at the start opening) rather than left-handed. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a right-handed game is played even during a big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (see FIG. 3) by left-handed. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start port 20 than to win the second start port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left turn is made to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start prizes than right-handed.

8). Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Main Process] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that main counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM 84. The initial value of the counter is “0”, the initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, and the initial value of the status is “1”. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, a power-on process described later is performed (S001).

  Then, following the power-on process (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), the various random number counter values shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU 82 at a cycle of 4 msec. Various counters by normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) after main timer interrupt process (S005) is finished and until main timer interrupt process (S005) is started next time The value update process is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

  Here, before explaining the power-on process (S001), the point of checking whether the stored contents of the special memory 89, which is one of the features of the present embodiment, is correct will be explained. In this embodiment, not only the checksum of the RAM 84 (hereinafter referred to as “gaming RAM 84”) is calculated and stored in the event of a power outage due to business termination or power failure, but also the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated and stored. It has come to keep. The checksum is one of error detection codes calculated to check the reliability of each stored data (command or the like). In this embodiment, each data stored in the game RAM 84 or the special memory 89 is regarded as a hexadecimal number, and the sum of these numbers is used as a checksum. However, the checksum may be a value calculated by another method.

  In this embodiment, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated when the power is turned on again after power interruption. Then, it is checked whether or not the checksum value of the special memory 89 calculated at this time matches the checksum value stored at the time of power interruption. As a result, if the checksum values match, the contents stored in the special memory 89 (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the bonus prize counter, the consecutive prizes) It is determined that the ball counter value, the fluctuation counter value, etc. are normal. Thereby, it is possible to display the output rate with the correct stored contents of the special memory 89. On the other hand, if the checksum values do not match, it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are abnormal. As a result, it is possible to avoid displaying the output rate with incorrect stored contents by erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89.

  [Power-On Process] As shown in FIG. 43, in the power-on process (S001), first, permission setting for access to the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is performed (S011). As a result, information can be written to and read from the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated (ON or not) (S012). That is, it is determined whether a signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is received from the power supply board 150. If the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated (YES in S012), the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if it is not operated (NO in S012), it is subsequently determined whether or not the power-off flag is ON (S013). The power-off flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of power interruption, and is a flag that is turned on in a power-off monitoring process (see FIG. 56) described later.

  If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S013), there is a possibility that the power has not been cut off normally, and the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S013), the checksum of the game RAM 84 is calculated (S014), and this is stored (stored) at the time of power-off. (See step S2903 in FIG. 56) (S015). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S015), it is determined that the content stored in the gaming RAM 84 is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the content stored in the gaming RAM 84 is normal, and the process proceeds to step S016.

  In step S016, setting management of the work area of the game RAM 84 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM 83 and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the game RAM 84. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the power-off flag (S017), and proceeds to step S021.

  On the other hand, in step S018, all information stored in the game RAM 84 is cleared (S018). However, at this time, the stored contents of the special memory 89 (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the bonus prize counter, the value of the continuous prize prize counter, the value of the fluctuation counter The value, combination ratio, and continuous combination ratio (see FIG. 11C)) are not cleared. As described above, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the output rate can be calculated as a converged value by not clearing the stored contents of the special memory 89. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 performs initial setting of the work area of the game RAM 84 (S019). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the ROM 83 is set in the work area of the gaming RAM 84. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub control board 90 of clearing of the stored contents of the game RAM 84 in the output buffer (S020), and proceeds to step S021.

  In step S021, the game control microcomputer 81 calculates the checksum of the special memory 89 and stores it in the checksum storage area of the special memory 89 stored (stored) when the power is interrupted (see FIG. 56). (See step S2905) (S022). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S022), it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are abnormal, and all information stored in the special memory 89 is cleared (S023). That is, the value of each counter shown in FIG. 11C is reset to “0” and the information stored in each storage area is erased. Thus, as described above, it is possible to avoid displaying the output rate with the stored contents of the special memory 89 which is incorrect. Then, a special memory clear command for notifying the sub control board 90 of clearing the stored contents of the special memory 89 is set in the output buffer (S024), and the process proceeds to step S025. On the other hand, if the checksum values match in step S022, it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are normal, the processing in steps S023 and S024 is passed, and the process proceeds to step S025.

  In step S025, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other initial settings, for example, setting of the CPU 82, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like, and ends this processing.

  [Main-side timer interrupt processing] Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), first, an input process to be described later is executed (S101). Then, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed in the same manner as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 42 (S102). Next, a start port sensor detection process described later is executed (S103), and a normal operation process is executed (S104).

  In the normal operation process (S104), a process for determining the normal symbol random number obtained in the start port sensor process (S103) and displaying the normal symbol indicating the determination result (variation display and stop display). Execute. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 generates data information (light emission data) for performing normal symbol fluctuation display at the timing of starting the normal symbol fluctuation display, and stores the data information in the game RAM 84. Set in the third game data storage area (see FIG. 11B). The third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting area 430 (see FIG. 12) including the normal symbol display 42 to emit light. It is. The game control microcomputer 81 also displays data information (light emission data) for displaying a normal symbol (ordinary winning symbol or normal lose symbol) indicating the determination result of the normal symbol lottery at the timing of starting the normal symbol stop display. ) And the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes a special operation process (to be described later) after the normal operation process (S104) (S105). Next, a specific area sensor detection process is executed (S106). In the specific area sensor detection process (S106), it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a. If there is a detection, the V flag indicating the transition to the high probability state is turned ON. As the V flag is turned ON, a V passing command for notifying the sub control board 90 of V passing is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84.

  After the specific area sensor detection process (S106), the game control microcomputer 81 executes an output process (S107) described later and a power-off monitoring process (S108) described later. Thereafter, other processing (S109) is executed, and the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is terminated. Until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82, the processes of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 42). When the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec), the main control again Side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed.

  [Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the input processing (S101), first, various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large size) that are mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A detection signal detected by the winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 9) is read (S110). Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is a winning detection signal related to payout of the winning ball (S111). If it is not a winning detection signal (NO in S111), other processing (S122) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S118. For example, if it is a fraud detection signal based on detection by a magnetic sensor, an impact sensor, or the like, processing for performing fraud notification is executed as other processing (S122).

  On the other hand, if it is a winning detection signal (YES in S111), the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to (S112). As shown in FIG. 11A, the prize ball number counter addition table indicates the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening, as well as a counter for 100 balls, a bonus prize ball counter, and a consecutive prize prize number. It is a table showing which of the counters the number of prize balls is counted up (added). After referring to the prize ball number counter addition table (S112), a prize ball command for paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 110 by an output process (S107) described later.

  After step S113, the game control microcomputer 81 executes prize ball number counter addition processing described later based on the referenced prize ball number counter addition table (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (inner frame 52 relative to outer frame 51), that is, whether or not there is detection by the frame open detection switch 50a (S115). If there is a detection (YES in S115), it is subsequently determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S116). The customer waiting flag is a flag indicating that the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S116), an exit rate calculation process described later is executed (S117), and the process proceeds to step S118. On the other hand, if there is no detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a (NO in S115) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S116), the process proceeds to step S118 without executing the exit rate calculation process (S117).

  That is, in this embodiment, the exit rate calculation process (S117, specific calculation process) is performed only when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting is satisfied. This is based on the following reason. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a limited processing capability. When the special symbol variation display is being executed or during the control to the big hit game state (game control state), the game control microcomputer 81 is executing a control process with a larger load than in the customer waiting state. Therefore, in addition to the control processing related to the special symbol variation display (specific control processing) or the control processing during the control of the big hit gaming state (specific control processing), the gaming control microcomputer 81 may perform division with a large load. If execution is performed up to the output rate calculation process (S117) for performing the process, there is a possibility that an excessive processing load may be imposed. From the above, in the game control state where the load of the control process is large, the turnout rate calculation process (S117) is not performed, and in the customer waiting state where the load of the control process is small, the turnout rate calculation process (S117) is performed. It is possible to distribute the control processing load of the game control microcomputer 81. As will be described later, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed or not waiting for a customer (when the display condition is not satisfied), the payout rate display 300 displays a payout rate (a bonus rate, a continuous bonus rate). Is not displayed. For this reason, when the output rate is not displayed, the output rate calculation process (S117) is not executed, so that unnecessary control processing is not performed.

  In step S118, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated. If it has not been operated (NO in S118), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is operated (YES in S118), it is determined whether or not the current display flag is “1” (S119). The display flag indicates a value of “1” or “2”. If the display flag is “1” (YES in S119), the display flag is switched to “2” (S120), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S119), the display flag is switched to “1” (S121), and this process is terminated. That is, every time the RAM clear switch 152 is operated, the display flag is switched to “1” or “2”.

  Here, the relationship between the display flag and the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 will be described. As will be described later, when the rate is displayed, if the display flag is “1”, the accessory ratio is displayed, and if the display flag is “2”, the consecutive accessory ratio is displayed. Yes. Therefore, each time the person who confirms the turnout operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio. Conventionally, the RAM clear switch 152 is only operated when the power is turned on. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the existing RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used as an operation means for switching between the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio without providing a new switch.

  [Prize Ball Counter Addition Processing] As shown in FIG. 46, in the winning ball counter addition processing (S114), first, the type of winning detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 45 and the prize shown in FIG. 11 (A). Based on the ball counter addition table, the value of the counter for 100 balls is added (S201). For example, if the winning is to the normal winning opening 27, the value of the counter for 100 balls is incremented by “8”, and if the winning is to the first big winning opening 30, the value of the counter for 100 balls is set to “15”. "Only. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for 100 balls is “100” or more (S202). If it is less than “100” (NO in S202), the process proceeds to step S205. On the other hand, if it is “100” or more (YES in S202), the value of the actual total winning ball counter is incremented by “1”, and the value of the counter for 100 balls is decremented by “100”. move on. In this way, it is possible to count the total number of winning balls acquired by the player as one in units of one hundred balls.

  In step S205, it is determined whether or not it is a prize to the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35). If the prize is awarded to the big prize opening (YES in S205), the value of the prize winning ball counter is incremented by “15” (S206), and the value of the consecutive prize winning ball counter is incremented by “15”. Then, this processing is finished (S207). On the other hand, if it is not a prize to the big winning opening (NO in S205), it is subsequently determined whether or not it is a winning to the electric chew 22 (second starting opening 21) (S208). If it is a win to the electric chew 22 (YES in S208), the value of the prize winning ball counter is incremented by “7” (S209), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a prize for the electric chew 22 (S208), since it is a prize for the normal prize opening 27 or the first start opening 20, the bonus prize counter or the continuous prize prize counter is displayed. This processing is finished without adding.

  [Exit Rate Calculation Processing] As shown in FIG. 47, in the exit rate calculation processing (S117), it is first determined whether or not the value of the actual total winning ball number counter is “1” or more (S301). If it is “1” or more (YES in S301), an accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S302). Specifically, the value of the prize winning ball counter is divided by the value of the actual total winning ball counter. Accordingly, it is possible to easily calculate the accessory ratio as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. Note that, in the calculated accessory ratio, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the accessory ratio is stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 11C) (S303).

  Subsequently, a continuous character ratio calculation process is executed (S304). More specifically, the value of the consecutive combination prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball number counter. Accordingly, it is possible to easily calculate the continuous character ratio as a percentage value without performing multiplication processing of 100 times. In the calculated consecutive character ratio, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the continuous character ratio is stored in the continuous character ratio storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory (S305), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if the value of the actual total winning ball counter is not “1” or more in step S301, it is “0”, and this processing is finished. That is, when the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is “0”, the division cannot be performed by the denominator value of “0” in the processing of step S302 or S304, and thus this processing is immediately terminated.

  [Starting Port Sensor Detection Process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the starting port sensor detection process (S103), first, whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. (S401). If a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S401), a gate passage process (S402) is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S401), the gate passing process (S402) is passed and the process proceeds to step S403. In the gate passing process (S402), if the gate sensor 28a is ON, the normal symbol random number (see FIG. 38B) is acquired on condition that the normal symbol random number already stored is less than four. Then, it is stored in the ordinary figure storage unit 86. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the usual figure hold, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

  In step S403, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S403). If a game ball has not won at the second starting port 21 (NO at S403), the process proceeds to step S407, but if a game ball has won at the second starting port 21 (YES at S403), the special figure 2 is displayed. Whether the number of reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the gaming RAM 84) has reached "4" (upper limit storage number) (S404). If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached “4” (YES in S404), the process proceeds to Step S407, but if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than “4” (S404) NO), 1 is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number (S405). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure hold, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. .

  Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S406) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S406), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the fluctuation The pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is acquired (that is, the random value group shown in FIG. 38A is acquired), and the acquired special random number value is stored in the second special figure storage unit 85b as the current special figure. 2 It stores in the storage area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b according to the number of reserved balls.

  Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S103), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S407). . If a game ball has not won the first starting port 20 (NO in S407), the process is completed, but if a game ball has won the first starting port 20 (YES in S407), the special figure 1 is on hold. Whether or not the number of balls (the number of the first special figure hold, specifically the value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold provided in the gaming RAM 84) has reached "4" (upper limit storage number) Determine (S408). If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached “4” (YES in S408), the process is terminated, but if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than “4” (NO in S408). ), “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (S409). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure hold, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. .

  Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S410) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S410), similarly to the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S406), the big hit random number counter value (label-TRND-A) and the hit type random number counter value (label -TRND-AS) The reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the random value group shown in FIG. 38A is obtained), and the obtained random number values are obtained. It stores in the storage area of the 1st special figure reservation storage part 85a according to the present special figure 1 reservation ball number among 1st special figure reservation storage part 85a.

  [Special Operation Processing] As shown in FIG. 49, in the special operation processing (S105), the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages. “Special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. When the “special operation status” is “1” (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (S1302), and the “special operation status” is “2”. If this is the case (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol change processing (S1304) is performed. If the "special action status" is "3" (NO in S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305) Then, the special symbol confirmation process (S1306) is performed, and when the “special operation status” is “4” (S1301, S1303, S1305 are all NO), the special electric accessory process (S1307) is performed. The special operation status is “1” by default.

  [Special Symbol Waiting Process] As shown in FIG. 50, in the special symbol waiting process (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls) at the second start port 21 is “0”. Is determined (S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number of the first start port 20 (that is, the special figure 1 reserved ball number) is “0” ( S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also “0” (YES in S1407), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1416). If it is ON (YES in S1416), this process is terminated. If it is not ON (NO in S1416), the customer waiting flag is turned on (S1417), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not “0” (NO in S1401), special figure 2 big hit determination processing is executed (S1402). In the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned ON, and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine the win type. Next, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38A). .

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the special figure 2 reserved ball number by one (S1404). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure hold is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first hold in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b. The storage area corresponding to is cleared (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 change start process (S1406), the special operation status is set to “2” and the change start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the variable display of the second special symbol, and stores the data information in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11B). ))). The second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting sections LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

  If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” but the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), the special figure 1 big hit determination process is executed (S1408). In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned ON, and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine the win type. Next, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1409), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38A). .

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the special figure 1 reserved ball number by one (S1410). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure hold is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first hold in the first special figure storage unit 85a. The storage area corresponding to is cleared (S1411). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412), the special operation status is set to “2” and the variation start command is set to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and stores the data information in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11B). ))). The first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

  In step S1413, the value of the variation counter in the special memory 89 is increased by “1”. Thus, the number of fluctuations (the number of times of special symbol fluctuation display) since the first power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is counted. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1414). If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1414), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1415), and this processing is terminated.

  In the special symbol variation processing (S1304) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation stop command is set in the output buffer, and the special operation status is set to “3”. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special diagram 1 at the timing for displaying the first special symbol in a stopped state. Then, the data information is set in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84. On the other hand, if it is the timing to stop and display the second special symbol, data information (light emission data) for performing the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special diagram 2 is created, and the data information is displayed. Set in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

  In the special symbol confirmation process (S1306) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol. If the symbol is a jackpot symbol, a special operation status is displayed to execute the special electric accessory processing (S1307). Set to “4”. At this time, the jackpot opening command is set in the output buffer. If it is not a jackpot symbol, the special operation status is set to “1” in order to execute the special symbol standby process (S1302) again. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1306), in order to manage the control period in the high probability state, if the probability variation flag is ON, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by one, and if it becomes “0”, the probability variation flag is set. Turn off. Further, in order to manage the control period in the time-short state (that is, the high base state), if the time-short flag is ON, the value of the time-short counter is decremented by 1, and when it becomes “0”, the time-short flag is turned OFF. Further, when the special operation status is set to “4”, if the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is ON, the special operation status is returned to OFF. In other words, during the big hit game, the low probability and low base state is controlled.

  In this special symbol confirmation process (S1306), when changing the gaming state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the gaming state, and uses the data information as the gaming information. Set in the fourth game data storage area of the RAM 84 (see FIG. 11B). The fourth game data storage area of the gaming RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing the game light emitting sections LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting area 440 (see FIG. 12) including the gaming status indicator 46 to emit light. It is. The game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying that it should be right-handed when starting the jackpot game, and stores the data information in the game RAM 84. 4 Set in the game data storage area. Further, data information (light emission data) for displaying the number of rounds in the jackpot game is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

  [Special Electric Property Processing (Big Bonus Game)] As shown in FIG. 51, in the special electric character processing (S1307), it is first determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2201). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) has been completed in the running big hit game.

  If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening is being opened (S2202). If it is not open (NO in S2202), whether or not it has reached the time to open the big winning opening, that is, the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and the opening time of the first round game has been reached, or It is determined whether or not an interval time (closing time) until the once closed big winning opening is opened again has reached the opening start time (S2203).

  If the decision result in the step S2203 is NO, the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S2203 is YES, it is judged whether or not the currently executed jackpot game is a jackpot game as a V long jackpot (S2204). If it is not the V long jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2207. If it is the V long jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the 16th round in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (S2205). If it is not the timing to start the 16th round (NO in S2205), the process proceeds to step S2207. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 16th round (YES in S2205), the V valid period setting process (S2206) is performed.

  In the V valid period setting process (S2206), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid for several seconds during the 16th round while the second big prize opening 35 is opened and after the second big prize opening 35 is closed. Set to the valid period of V to be determined. In this embodiment, a period other than this (including the case where no jackpot game is being executed) is set as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid.

  In step S2207, the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 37) according to the type of jackpot. Note that the sorting member 71 always moves with a constant motion from the start of the round game (or jackpot game).

  In a succeeding step S2208, a round designation command transmission determination process is performed. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2208), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening in step S2207 is the first release in one round game. A round designation command including information on the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84.

  In step S2202 of the special electric accessory processing (S1307), if the special prize opening is being opened (YES in S2202), it is determined whether or not the special prize closing condition is satisfied (S2209). In this embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of winning a prize winning in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning quantity (8 in this embodiment per 1R), or the time for closing the winning prize opening. (That is, a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 37) has passed since the special winning opening was opened). If the closing condition for the special prize opening is not satisfied (NO in S2209), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied (YES in S2209), the special prize opening is closed (blocked) (S2210). When one round game is ended by closing step S2210 (YES in S2211), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0”. (S2213). If it is not “0” (NO in S2013), the process is finished as it is to start the next round game.

  On the other hand, if it is “0” (YES in S2213), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2214), and the jackpot ending is started (S2215). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2216), and this process is terminated.

  If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2201 (YES in S2201), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the jackpot ending time has passed (S2217) and the ending time has passed. If not (NO in S2217), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2217), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2218), the jackpot flag is turned off (S2219), and the special operation status is set to “1” (S2220). Thereafter, a game state setting process (S2221) is performed, and this process is terminated.

  In the game state setting process (S2221), it is determined whether or not the above-described V flag is ON. If the V flag is not ON, the hour / hour flag is turned ON and “100” is set to the hour / hour counter. As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game is controlled to a low-accuracy base state in which the number of time reductions is set to 100. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are turned ON, and “160” is set in the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter. As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a highly accurate base state in which the so-called ST number is set to 160 times.

  In this gaming state setting process (S2221), the gaming control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the gaming state after the change in order to change the gaming state, and uses the data information. It is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84. In addition, in order to end the jackpot game, data information for deleting the display of the number of rounds is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

  [Output Process] The game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (S107) after the special operation process (S105) and the specific area sensor detection process (S106) described above (see FIG. 44). In the output process (S107), as shown in FIG. 52, first, whether or not the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (inner frame 52 relative to outer frame 51), that is, whether there is detection by the frame open detection switch 50a. It is determined whether or not (S2301). If the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301), that is, if there is no detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a, a game display process described later is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The game display process (S2303) is a process for causing the game display 40 to display game information (such as jackpot symbol and game state) related to the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S2301), it is subsequently determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, that is, whether or not the customer waiting state is set (S2302). If the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), game display processing is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), an exit rate display process (specific display process) described later is executed (S2304), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The rate display process (S2304) is a process for displaying the rate on the rate display 300. In step S2305, as other output setting processing, a command set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. Finish.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed, or if a special symbol variation display or a jackpot game is being executed, the game display process (S2303) is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame is open and the special symbol variation display and the big hit game are not executed, the turnout display processing (S2304) is executed. In other words, the display condition (hereinafter simply referred to as “display condition”) for displaying the rate on the rate display 300 is limited to that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. ing. The reason for limiting the display condition in this way is based on the following reason.

  First, as described above, the rate indicator 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 so that the person who checks the rate can check the rate as reliable information. Therefore, unless the gaming machine frame 50 is opened, the rate indicator 300 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is preferable that the display condition is the opening of the gaming machine frame 50 that allows the rate indicator to be visually recognized. That is, according to the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of this embodiment, from the viewpoint of avoiding the increase of IC as much as possible and preventing blinking in the dynamic lighting control, the display and display on the game display device 40 are designed. The display on the rate indicator 300 is alternative. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 50 is open, it is preferable that the game information is not displayed on the game display 40 because the game is basically not performed by the player.

  However, immediately after the gaming machine frame 50 is opened, when the special symbol variation display is still being executed, or when the game ball enters the start ports 20 and 21 and the special symbol variation display is started. possible. In this case, game information must be displayed on the game display 40. That is, it is necessary not to display the output rate on the output rate display 300. In this way, the display condition is limited to the waiting state in addition to the gaming machine frame 50 being opened. The rate of participation is not shown to the player, but to the person who inspects whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illegally modified. It is enough that it is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to display the participation rate during the game, and there is no problem even if the display conditions are limited as described above.

  [Game Display Processing] In the game display processing (S2303), as shown in FIG. 53, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is “1”. The common flag is set to any value of “1”, “2”, “3”, or “4”. It shows whether or not to perform light emission control.

  If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2401), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2402). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched (set) to the “H” level (S2403) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the previous light emission state in the fourth light emission region 440 (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2404). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2405) (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410. Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2406). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2407) (see FIG. 19). Thereby, it is possible to make the game light-emitting portions LA1 to LA8 emit light in a light-emission mode (for example, jackpot symbol) to be displayed in the first light-emitting area 410. Then, the common flag is switched to “2” (S2408), and this process is finished.

  If the common flag is not “1” in step S2401, the process proceeds to step S2409, and it is determined whether or not the common flag is “2”. If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2409), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2410). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2411) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the previous light emission state in the first light emission region 410 (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2412). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2413) (see FIG. 20). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light emitting region 420. Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the second game data storage area of the gaming RAM 84, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2414). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2415) (see FIG. 21). Thereby, it is possible to make the game light emission parts LA9 to LA16 emit light in a light emission mode (for example, a lost pattern) to be displayed in the second light emission region 420. Then, the common flag is switched to “3” (S2416), and this process is finished.

  If the common flag is not “2” in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2417, and it is determined whether or not the common flag is “3”. If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2417), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2418). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2419) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the previous light emission state in the second light emission region 420 (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2420). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2421) (see FIG. 22). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the third light emitting region 430. Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D [0. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2423) (see FIG. 23). Thereby, it is possible to make game light emission part LA17-LA24 light-emit with the light emission mode which should be displayed in the 3rd light emission area | region 430. FIG. Then, the common flag is switched to “4” (S2424), and this process ends.

  If the common flag is not “3” in step S2417, the common flag is set to “4”, and the process proceeds to step S2425. In step S2425, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2426) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the light emission state in the third light emission region 430 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2427). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2428) (see FIG. 24). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the fourth light emitting region 440. Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the fourth game data storage area of the gaming RAM 84, the data information D [0 ... 7] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2429). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2430) (see FIG. 25). Thereby, it is possible to make the game light emission parts LA25 to LA32 emit light in a light emission mode to be displayed in the fourth light emission region 440. Then, the common flag is switched to “1” (S2431), and this process ends.

  [Output Rate Display Process] In the output ratio display process (S2304), as shown in FIG. 54, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is “1” (S2501). The common flag is also used in the game display process (S2303) described above, and indicates in which lighting area of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the rate indicator 300 the lighting control is performed.

  If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2501), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2502). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2503) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2504). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2505) (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the lighting area which can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2506). As described above, the display flag is switched to either “1” or “2” by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 45). “2” indicates a display of a continuous character ratio. If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2506), data for displaying the tenths of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Information D [0... 7] is output (S2507). On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2506), the tenth place of the continuous feature ratio stored in the continuous feature ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D [0... 7] is output (S2508). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2509) (see FIG. 28). Accordingly, it is possible to turn on the lighting units for output rate LB1 to LB8 in a lighting mode (for example, “6”) to be displayed in the first lighting region 310. Then, the common flag is switched to “2” (S2510), and this process is finished.

  If the common flag is not “1” in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2511 to determine whether or not the common flag is “2”. If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2511), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2512). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2513) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2514). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2515) (see FIG. 29). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2516). If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2516), data for displaying the first digit of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Information D [0 ... 7] is output (S2517). On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2516), the first place of the continuous feature ratio stored in the continuous feature ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D [0... 7] is output (S2518). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2519) (see FIG. 30). Thereby, it is possible to light the lighting portions LB9 to LB16 for the output rate in a lighting mode (for example, “0”) to be displayed in the second lighting region 320. Then, the common flag is switched to “3” (S2520), and this process ends.

  If the common flag is not “2” in step S2511, as shown in FIG. 55, the process proceeds to step S2521, and it is determined whether or not the common flag is “3”. If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2521), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2522). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2523) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2524). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2525) (see FIG. 31). Thereby, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2526).

  If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2526), data information D [0... 7] for displaying “1” is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2527). That is, data information D [0 ... 7] = [01100000] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2529), the output rate lighting portions LB18 and LB19 of the third lighting region 330 are lit and “1” is displayed. Thus, in this embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are given to the person who confirms the outage rate. It is made to grasp that the number (outgoing rate) of is an accessory ratio.

  On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2526), data information D [0... 7] for displaying “2” is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2528). That is, data information D [0... 7] = [11011010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2529) (see FIG. 32), the output rate lighting portions LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, LB23 of the third lighting region 330 are turned on, “2” is displayed. In this way, in this embodiment, if “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 are given to the person who confirms the outage rate. It is made to grasp that the number (outgoing rate) of is a continuous character ratio. In step S2530, the common flag is switched to “4”, and this process ends.

  If the common flag is not “3” in step S2521, the common flag is “4”, and the process proceeds to step S2531. In step S2531, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2532) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2533). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2534) (see FIG. 33). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball counter in the special memory 89 is “100” or more (S2535). In other words, it is determined whether or not the total number of winning balls since the first power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached “10000”. If it is “100” or more (YES in S2535), the process proceeds to step S2536. On the other hand, if it is not “100” or more (NO in S2535), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter in the special memory 89 is “3000” or more (S2537). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations since the power is first turned on for this pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached “3000”. If it is equal to or greater than “3000” (YES in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2536. In step S2536, data information D [0... 7] for displaying “1” is output. That is, data information D [0... 7] = D [01100000] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2539) (see FIG. 34), the output rate lighting portions LB26 and LB27 in the fourth lighting region 340 are lit and “1” is displayed. The In this way, in this embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, the displayed rate (the ratio of the connected objects or the ratio of the continuous objects) is converged to some extent on the person who confirms the output rate. To make sure that the value is valid.

  On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is less than “100” (NO in S2535) and the value of the variation counter is less than “3000” (NO in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2538. . In step S2538, data information D [0... 7] for displaying “0” is output. That is, data information D [0... 7] = [11111100] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2539), the output rate lighting portions LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, and LB30 in the fourth lighting region 340 are lit, and “0”. Is displayed. In this way, in this embodiment, if “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, the display rate (the ratio of the consecutive items or the ratio of the continuous items) is still converged on the person who confirms the rate of return. Let them know that they are reference values that may not have been used. In step S2540, the common flag is switched to “1”, and this process ends.

  [Power-off monitoring process] The game control microcomputer 81 executes the power-off monitoring process (S108) after the output process (S107) described above (see FIG. 44). In the power-off monitoring process (S108), as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2901). If there is no input (NO in S2901), the process is terminated. The power-off signal is a signal that is input by the game control microcomputer 81 when the voltage of the monitored power source starts to decrease due to power interruption. Specifically, the power supply board 150 monitors the generated voltage of 32V, and when the voltage becomes 17V (predetermined voltage value) or less, a power-off signal is output to the game control microcomputer 81, and from that time, a predetermined value is output. A reset signal is output after a lapse of time. Note that the voltage to be monitored and the voltage value (predetermined voltage value) when the power-off signal is output can be changed as appropriate.

  If a power-off signal is input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), a checksum of the gaming RAM 84 is calculated (S2902), and the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2903). . Next, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated (S2904), and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory 89 (S2905). Subsequently, the power-off flag is turned on (S2906), and access prohibition to the game RAM 84 and special memory 89 is set (S2907). As a result, information cannot be written to or read from the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89. Thereafter, the loop processing is performed without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 44).

9. Operation of effect control microcomputer 91 [Sub-control main process] Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power-off flag (the flag that is turned on at the time of power interruption) is ON and the contents of the RAM 94 are normal (S4001). If this determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the content of the RAM 94 is abnormal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, initialization of the RAM 94 is performed. Then (S4002), the process proceeds to step S4003.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4001), that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is turned on due to power interruption, but the contents of the RAM 94 are kept normal, then the RAM is cleared. It is determined whether a notification command has been received (S4011). If the RAM clear notification command has been received (YES in S4011), the stored contents of the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are cleared. Therefore, the stored contents of the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are cleared (S4002), and the process proceeds to step S4003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S4011), the process proceeds to step S4003 without clearing the stored contents of the RAM 94.

  In step S4003, other initial settings are performed. In other initial settings, for example, settings of the CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are performed. If the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

  In step S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. It should be noted that the effect determination random number includes an effect design determination random number for determining the effect design, a change effect pattern determination random number for determining the change effect pattern, and a notice effect determination random number for determining various notification effects. Etc. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Random values may not be added one by one at the time of update, but may be added two by two. The same applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process (S4006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are sent to the image control board 100. The image control board 100 that has received the command executes various effects (a variation effect, a jackpot effect including an opening effect, a round effect, and an ending effect) using the image display device 7 in accordance with the command. Note that the sub control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 in accordance with execution of various effects by the image control board 100. Further, the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light through the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108, and the board movable body 15 is driven. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed.

  [Reception Interrupt Processing] In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned on, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. And processing executed in preference to other interrupt processing (S4009, S4010). As shown in FIG. 41, in the reception interrupt process (S4008), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the reception buffer of the RAM 94 (S4101).

  [1 ms Timer Interrupt Process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1 msec cycle is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 59, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), an input process (S4201) is first performed. In the input process (S4201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on detection signals from the effect button detection switch 63a (see FIG. 10) and the select button detection switch 64a (see FIG. 10).

  Subsequently, lamp data output processing (S4202) is performed. In the lamp data output process (S4202), the lamp data created in the other process (S4304) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (to be described later) is sent to the sub drive board 107 in order to cause the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 to emit light at a timing suitable for the production. Output. That is, the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lamp data.

  Next, drive control processing (S4203) is performed. In the drive control process (S4203), drive data (data for driving the movable board drive motor 15a) is created or output so as to drive the movable board 15 at a timing that matches the performance. That is, the panel movable body 15 is driven in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

  Then, the watchdog timer process (S4204) for setting the reset of the watchdog timer is performed, and this process is finished.

  [10 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 60, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process to be described later is performed (S4301). Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM 94 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4302) is performed (S4303).

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66), and creates voice data (data for controlling output of voice from the speaker 67) and voice. Other processes such as outputting to the control board 106 and updating various effect determination random numbers are executed (S4304), and this process ends.

  [Reception Command Analysis Processing] As shown in FIG. 61, in the reception command analysis processing (S4301), the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it has been received, a variation production start process is performed (S4402). In the variation effect start process (S4402), the variation start command is analyzed, and a variation effect pattern is selected based on the analysis result. Also, an effect symbol as a stop symbol and a notice effect are selected. Then, a change effect start command for starting the change effect with the selected effect content is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if received, performs a change effect end process (S4404). In the variation effect end processing (S4404), the variation stop command is analyzed, and a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 based on the analysis result.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if received, performs an opening effect selection process (S4406). In the opening effect selection process (S4406), the opening command is analyzed, and the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if received, performs a round effect selection process (S4408). In the round effect selection process (S4408), the round designation command is analyzed, and the pattern (contents) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S4410). In the ending effect selection process (S4410), the ending command is analyzed, and the ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the jackpot game ending is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a special memory clear command is received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if received, performs special memory clear notification processing (S4412). In the special memory clear notification process (S4412), a special memory clear notification command for notifying that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been deleted is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As a result, when the special memory clear notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100, as shown in FIG. A clear image CL1 indicating the characters “Special memory cleared” is displayed. At this time, a special sound indicating that the stored content of the special memory 89 has been erased is output from the speaker 67. In this way, it is possible to easily recognize that the contents stored in the special memory 89 have been erased, that is, the output rate has been initialized. Note that the notification mode indicating that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been deleted can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a clear image CL2 indicating the characters “initialization rate is initialized” is displayed on the display screen 7a, or a predetermined lamp (frame lamp 66 or panel lamp 5) is displayed. You may make it light-emit in a special light emission mode.

  In step S4413, as other processing, processing based on a received command other than the above-described command (for example, processing for performing V-pass notification based on a V-pass command indicating passage to the specific area 39) is performed. Then, the received command analysis process (S4301) ends.

10. Effects of the present embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment (first embodiment), as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the exit rate. That is, the winning rate is displayed by the main control board 80 that performs main game control, and for example, the outgoing rate is not displayed by the sub-control board 90. Therefore, it is possible for a person who confirms (inspects) the rate of return to grasp the rate of return as reliable information. As a result, it is possible to correctly determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illegally modified or whether the rate of turnout is abnormal due to a malfunction or failure.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, display on the game display 40 and display on the rate display 300 are alternatively performed. As a result, the display control by the game control microcomputer 81 can be prevented from becoming complicated. Then, the display condition for displaying the rate on the rate display 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. For this reason, even when a game ball enters the start ports 20 and 21 when the gaming machine frame 50 is open and a special symbol variation display is started, the display condition is not satisfied. Therefore, in the above-described case, game information (special symbols, etc.) relating to the progress of the game is displayed on the game display 40 to prevent the game information display function from being lost despite the game being played. It is possible.

11. Modification Example A modification example will be described below. In the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Modification of the first embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the said 1st form, it comprised so that an output rate could be displayed on the output rate display 300. FIG. On the other hand, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the base is displayed on the base display. The base (specific ratio value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls, number of specific game balls) that is the number of game balls that the player has fired. is there. The base display for displaying the base is composed of four 7-segment segments, and has the same hardware configuration as the output rate display 300 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, in the following, it will be referred to as “base display (specific display) 300”. The number of shot balls is a value (denominator measurement value) as a denominator before calculating the base, and the total number of award balls is a value (numerator measurement value) as a numerator before calculating the base.

  In order to calculate the base, it is necessary to count the number of shot balls. Here, in this embodiment, all the entrance holes provided in the game area 3 (the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first grand prize opening 30, the second big prize opening 35, the normal prize opening 27). The number of game balls that have entered the outlet 16) is counted. The number of game balls counted in this way is regarded as the number of shot balls. However, in the first embodiment, a sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the out port 16 is not provided.

  Therefore, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 63, the out port sensor 16a is arranged on the out port discharge path HK extending from the out port 16 to the outside of the game area 3. The out port sensor 16 a detects a game ball that has entered the out port 16. The game balls that have entered the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, the second major winning port 35, or the ordinary winning port 27 do not pass through the out port sensor 16a. The game area 3 is discharged outside. That is, the out-port sensor 16a of this modification detects a game ball that has not won any winning opening. As shown in FIG. 64, the main control board 80 is connected to the outlet sensor 16a via the relay board 88. Therefore, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a is input to the game control microcomputer 81.

  Here, in order to count the number of shot balls, a method of providing a sensor for detecting a game ball that is launched toward the game area 3 in the vicinity of the rail member 4 (see FIG. 1) can be considered. However, in this method, there is a possibility that after the game ball that has been fired by the sensor is detected, the game ball that has returned with a weak momentum may be detected again, and there is a possibility that the exact number of fired balls cannot be counted. Therefore, in this modification, the number of shot balls can be counted as accurately as possible by counting all the game balls discharged out of the game area 3.

  By the way, a pachinko machine is subjected to a test firing test of the base (race rate) before installing the hall. In the one-hour test test, it is inspected that the base is not 3 (300%) or more. In the 10-hour test test, it is inspected that the base exceeds 0.5 (50%) and is not 2 (200%) or more. However, in the past, it was not possible to completely deny the possibility that the base has been out of the normal range due to unauthorized modification after being inspected or due to failure or malfunction. Therefore, in this modification, the base can be displayed on the base display 300.

  In this modification, there are three types of bases. In the base in the normal gaming state (non-short state), in the short state (high probability state and short state, or low probability state and short state) and jackpot gaming state (from the start to the end of the jackpot game) Is the base of The base in the normal gaming state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the normal gaming state. The base in the short time state is a ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the short time state. The base in the jackpot gaming state is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the jackpot gaming state. By checking each base divided for each gaming state in this way, it is possible to more accurately determine the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 than when only the bases for all gaming states can be confirmed.

  Next, display on the base display 300 will be described. In the first lighting area 310, the base in the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “normal base”) or the base in the short time state (hereinafter referred to as “short time base”) is displayed as a percentage (percentage). The number of the place is displayed. However, the normal base and the short-time base can hardly exceed 1 (100%), but the base in the jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the “hit base (race rate)”) exceeds approximately 1. Become. Accordingly, in the first lighting region 310, hundreds of places when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage are displayed.

  In the second lighting area 320, the number of the first place when the normal base or the time base is displayed as a percentage is displayed, whereas the tens place when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage is displayed. In this modification, the base display 300 does not display the first place when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage. It is almost meaningless to confirm to the third significant digit in the jackpot base.

  In the third lighting region 330, the base displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 indicates whether the base is a normal base, a time reduction base, or a jackpot base. In this modification, when the normal base is displayed, “1” is displayed in the third lighting region 330. When the time base is displayed, “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. When the jackpot base is displayed, “3” is displayed in the third lighting region 330.

  In the fourth lighting region 340, the base displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 indicates whether it is an effective value or a reference value. The meaning of the effective value or the reference value is to indicate whether or not the base is a value converged to some extent, as in the meaning of the first embodiment. In this modified example, the total number of fired balls since the power was turned on until the present time (the sum of the number of fired balls in the normal game state, the number of fired balls in the short-time state and the number of fired balls in the jackpot game state) is “100,000. "The first condition that the number of departures is greater than or equal to the first condition, or the second condition that the number of fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display has been executed up to the present time after the power is turned on is greater than or equal to" 3000 "(predetermined number of revolutions). If such a condition is satisfied, the base is regarded as a value converged to some extent (effective value). On the other hand, if neither the first condition nor the second condition described above is satisfied, the base is regarded as a value that does not converge to some extent (reference value).

  As shown in FIG. 65C, the special memory 89 according to the modification is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the base. Specifically, the special memory 89 includes a normal 100 ball counter, a normal shot ball counter, a normal total award ball counter, a normal base storage area, a time-short 100 ball counter, a short-time shot ball counter, and a short-time total award ball number. There are provided a counter, a short-time base storage area, a jackpot 100 ball counter, a jackpot firing ball counter, a jackpot total prize ball counter, a jackpot base storage area, a variation counter, and a checksum storage area. Similar to the special memory 89 of the first embodiment, the special memory 89 according to the modification is a volatile storage unit (DRAM) that cannot retain the stored contents when power is not supplied. However, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on, as in the first embodiment.

  The normal 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of shots fired by the player in the normal game state one by one, and is reset to a value of “0” when 100 balls are counted. It has become. The normal firing ball number counter (second counter) counts one when the 100 balls are counted by the normal 100 ball counter. These normal 100-ball counter and normal-fire ball number counter measure the number of shot balls in the normal game state from the time when the power is turned on to the present time as one (unit for hundred balls). It is. Thus, by calculating the normal base using the normal 100 ball counter and the normal shot ball number counter, as described in the first embodiment, it is possible to simplify the software processing at the time of division. At the same time, the multiplication process of multiplying by 100 can be omitted. The normal total number of winning balls counter counts the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state from when the power is turned on until now. The normal base storage area stores the calculated normal base.

  The time-short 100 ball counter (first counter) counts the number of shots fired by the player in the time-short state one by one. When 100 balls are counted, the counter is reset to “0”. ing. The short-time firing ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the short-time 100 ball counter. These hourly short ball counters and hourly short ball counters measure the number of shot balls in the short time state from when the power is turned on to the present time as one unit (one hundred ball measuring means). is there. By calculating the time base using the time-short 100 ball counter and the time-shot ball number counter in this way, it is possible to simplify the software processing at the time of division as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, the multiplication process of multiplying by 100 can be omitted. The short-time total award ball counter is for counting the total number of award balls in the short-time state from when the power is turned on to the present time. The time base storage area stores the calculated time base.

  The jackpot counter for 100 balls (first counter) counts the number of shots fired by the player in the jackpot game state one by one, and is reset to a value of “0” when 100 balls are counted. It has become. The big hit firing ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the big hit 100 ball counter. The jackpot 100 ball counter and the jackpot fired ball counter measure the number of fired balls in the jackpot gaming state from the time when the power is turned on to the present time as one unit per hundred balls (measurement means for hundred balls) It is. Thus, by calculating the jackpot base using the jackpot 100 ball counter and the jackpot firing ball number counter, it is possible to simplify the software processing at the time of division as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, the multiplication process of multiplying by 100 can be omitted. The jackpot total prize ball counter counts the total number of prize balls in the jackpot gaming state from when the power is turned on until now. The jackpot base storage area stores the calculated jackpot base. Since the variation counter and the checksum storage area are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  [Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the modified example shown in FIG. 66, step S150 is provided instead of step S111, and the processing is changed to step S117 as compared with the input processing (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. Step S152 is provided, and Steps S153 to S157 are provided instead of Steps S119 to S121. As shown in FIG. 66, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a detection signal from each sensor in step S110, and then determines in step S150 whether or not it is a ball entry detection signal. That is, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 20a, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 21a, a detection signal from the first big prize port sensor 30a, a detection signal from the second big prize port sensor 35a, and a normal prize port sensor 27a. It is determined whether it is a detection signal or a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If it is a ball entry detection signal (YES in S150), after steps S112 and S113, a counter addition process described later is executed (S151). However, in this modified example, when the detection signal is from the outlet sensor 16a, the prize ball command is not set in step S113. If the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S115) and is in a customer waiting state (YES in S116), a base calculation process described later is executed (S152).

  If it is determined in step S118 that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S153. In step S153, it is determined whether or not the current display flag is “1”. The display flag of the modified example indicates a value of “1”, “2”, or “3”. If the display flag is “1” (YES in S153), the display flag is switched to “2” (S154), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not “1” (NO in S153), it is subsequently determined whether or not the display flag is “2” (S155). If it is “2” (YES in S155), the display flag is switched to “3” (S156), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not “2” (NO in S155), it is “3”, the display flag is switched to “1” (S157), and this processing is completed.

  In this modification, when the base is displayed as described later, if the display flag is “1”, the normal base is displayed, and if the display flag is “2”, the time base is displayed. If the flag is “3”, the jackpot base is displayed. Therefore, each time the person who confirms the base operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the normal base display, the short-time base display, and the jackpot base display.

  [Counter Addition Processing] As shown in FIG. 67, in the counter addition processing (S151), it is first determined whether or not the normal gaming state (normal probability state and non-short-time state) (S160). That is, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy flag indicating the high probability state is OFF and the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is OFF. If it is in the normal gaming state (YES in S160), the value of the normal 100 ball counter is incremented by “1” (S161). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal 100 ball counter has reached “100” or more (S162). If it is less than “100” (NO in S162), the process proceeds to step S165. On the other hand, if it is “100” or more (YES in S162), the value of the normal firing ball counter is incremented by “1” (S163), and the value of the counter for normal 100 balls is decremented by “100” ( S164), the process proceeds to step S165. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state as one in units of one hundred balls.

  In step S165, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the out port 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 in FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If the ball enters the out port 16 (YES in S165), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a ball entering the out port (NO in S165), a winning port (first starting port 20, second starting port 21, first large winning port 30, second large winning port 35, normal winning port 27) ). In this case, the value of the normal total prize ball number counter is added based on the type of the ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. (S166), and this processing is finished. For example, in the normal gaming state, if the winning is to the normal winning opening 27, the value of the normal total winning ball counter is incremented by “8”.

  If it is determined in step S160 that the game state is not the normal gaming state, it is subsequently determined whether or not the state is a short time state (a high probability state and a short state, or a normal probability state and a short state) (S167). That is, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If it is in the time-short state (YES in S167), the value of the time-short 100-ball counter is incremented by “1” (S168). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-short 100-ball counter has reached “100” or more (S169). If it is less than “100” (NO in S169), the process proceeds to step S172. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than “100” (YES in S169), the value of the hour / hour shot ball counter is incremented by “1” (S170) and the value of the hour / hour 100 ball counter is decremented by “100” ( S171), the process proceeds to step S172. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the time-short state as one in units of one hundred balls.

  In step S172, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the out port 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 in FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If the ball is entering the out port 16 (YES in S172), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a ball entering the out mouth (NO in S172), it is based on the type of the ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. Then, the value of the hour / short total prize ball number counter is added (S173), and this process is finished. For example, if the winning time is in the normal winning opening 27 in the short time state, the value of the short time total winning ball counter is incremented by “8”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S167 that it is not in the time saving state, it means that it is a jackpot gaming state, and the process proceeds to step S174. In step S174, the value of the big hit 100 ball counter is incremented by “1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit 100 ball counter is “100” or more (S175). If it is less than “100” (NO in S175), the process proceeds to step S178. On the other hand, if it is “100” or more (YES in S175), the value of the big hitting ball number counter is incremented by “1” (S176), and the value of the big hit 100 ball counter is subtracted by “100” ( S177), and proceeds to step S178. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state as one in units of one hundred balls.

  In step S178, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the out port 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 in FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a. If the ball is entering the out port 16 (YES in S178), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a ball entering the out mouth (NO in S178), it is based on the type of the ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the winning ball counter addition table shown in FIG. Then, the value of the jackpot total award ball counter is added (S179), and this process is finished. For example, in the case of a big hit gaming state, if the winning is to the first big winning opening 30, the value of the big hit total winning ball counter is incremented by “15”.

  [Base Arithmetic Processing] As shown in FIG. 68, in the base arithmetic processing (S152, specific arithmetic processing), first, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state (normal probability state and non-time-short state) (S180). If it is the normal gaming state (YES in S180), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal firing ball number counter is “1” or more (S181). If it is “1” or more (YES in S181), normal base calculation processing is executed (S182). Specifically, the value of the normal total winning ball number counter is divided by the value of the normal firing ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the normal base as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated normal base, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the normal base value is stored in the normal base storage area (see FIG. 65C) of the special memory 89 (S183), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the normal firing ball number counter is not “1” or more in step S181, it is “0”, and the normal base cannot be calculated.

  If it is determined in step S180 that the game state is not the normal gaming state, it is subsequently determined whether or not the state is a short time state (a high probability state and a short state, or a normal probability state and a short state) (S184). If it is in the short time state (YES in S184), it is determined whether or not the value of the short time shot ball number counter is “1” or more (S185). If “1” or more (YES in S185), the time-short base calculation process is executed (S186). More specifically, the value of the hourly and shortest total winning ball number counter is divided by the value of the hourly and shorter firing ball number counter. Thus, it is possible to easily calculate the time base as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated time base, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the time base value is stored in the time base storage area (see FIG. 65C) of the special memory 89 (S187), and this processing is completed. On the other hand, if the value of the time-short launching ball number counter is not “1” or more in step S185, it is “0”, and the time-short base cannot be calculated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S184 that the time is not short, it means that the game is a jackpot gaming state, and the process proceeds to step S188. In step S188, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit firing ball number counter is “1” or more (S188). If it is “1” or more (YES in S188), the jackpot base calculation process is executed (S189). Specifically, the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the jackpot fired ball number counter. Thus, it is possible to easily calculate the jackpot base as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. Note that in the calculated time base, the value of one's place is rounded off. Then, the value of the jackpot base is stored in the jackpot base storage area (see FIG. 65C) of the special memory 89 (S190), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot firing ball counter is not “1” or more in step S188, it is “0” and the jackpot base cannot be calculated.

  [Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the modified example shown in FIG. 69, step S2340 is provided instead of step S2304 in the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the gaming control microcomputer 81 has a base display process (specific display process) to be described later if the gaming machine frame is opened (YES in S2301) and is in a customer waiting state (YES in S2302). ) Is executed (S2340). The base display process is a process for causing the base display 300 to display the base.

  [Base Display Processing] In the base display processing (S2340), as shown in FIG. 70, it is first determined whether or not the common flag is “1” (S2601). The common flag indicates in which lighting region of the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the base indicator 300 the lighting control is performed.

  If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2601), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2602). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2603) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2604). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2605). Thereby, the lighting area which can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2606). As described above, the display flag is switched to “1”, “2”, or “3” by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 66). “2” indicates a time base display, and “3” indicates a jackpot base display.

  If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2606), data information D for displaying the tenths of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. [0... 7] is output (S2607). On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2606), it is then determined whether or not the display flag is “2” (S2608). If the display flag is “2” (YES in S2608), data information D for displaying the tenth place of the time base stored in the time base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. [0... 7] is output (S2609). On the other hand, if the display flag is not “2” (NO in S2608), it is “3” and is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D [0 ... 7] for displaying the hundreds place of the jackpot base is output (S2610). After step S2607, S2609 or S2610, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2511). Thereby, it is possible to light in the lighting mode to be displayed in the first lighting region 310. Then, the common flag is switched to “2” (S2612), and this process ends.

  If the common flag is not “1” in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2621, as shown in FIG. 71, and it is determined whether or not the common flag is “2”. If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2621), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2622). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2623) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2624). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2625). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2626). If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2626), data information D for displaying the position of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. [0... 7] is output (S2627). On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2626), it is then determined whether or not the display flag is “2” (S2628). If the display flag is “2” (YES in S2628), the data information D for displaying the place of the time base stored in the time base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. [0... 7] is output (S2629). On the other hand, if the display flag is not “2” (NO in S2628), it is “3” and is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D [0... 7] for displaying the tens place of the jackpot base is output (S2630). After step S2627, S2629, or S2630, the output level of select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2531). Thereby, it is possible to light in the lighting mode to be displayed in the second lighting region 320. Then, the common flag is switched to “3” (S2632), and this process ends.

  If the common flag is not “2” in step S2621, the process proceeds to step S2641, as shown in FIG. 72, and it is determined whether or not the common flag is “3”. If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2641), first, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2642). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2643) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2644). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2645). Thereby, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2646). If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2646), data information D [0... 7] for displaying “1” is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2647). That is, data information D [0 ... 7] = [01100000] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2651), “1” is displayed in the third lighting region 330. In this way, in this embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who confirms the base will receive the two-digit numbers displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Make sure that the number (base) is the normal base.

  On the other hand, if the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2646), it is then determined whether or not the display flag is “2” (S2648). If the display flag is “2” (YES in S2648), data information D [0... 7] for displaying “2” is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2549). That is, data information D [0... 7] = [11011010] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2651), “2” is displayed in the third lighting region 330. In this way, in this embodiment, if “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who confirms the base will receive the two-digit numbers displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Make sure that the number (base) is a short-time base.

  On the other hand, if the display flag is not “2” in step S2648, it is “3”. In this case, data information D [0... 7] for displaying “3” is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2650). That is, data information D [0... 7] = [11110010] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2651), “3” is displayed in the third lighting region 330. In this way, in this embodiment, if “3” is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who confirms the base will receive the two-digit numbers displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Make sure that the numbers (base) are jackpots. After step S2651, the common flag is switched to “4” (S2652), and this process ends.

  If the common flag is not “3” in step S2641, the common flag is “4”, and the process proceeds to step S2661, as shown in FIG. In step S2661, data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2662) (see FIG. 17). Thus, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2663). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2664). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

  Subsequently, the total number of balls fired since the power was turned on until the current time (the sum of the number of fired balls in the normal gaming state, the number of fired balls in the short-time state and the number of fired balls in the jackpot gaming state) is “100000” It is determined whether or not the number is longer than the number of departures. Specifically, it is determined whether the sum of the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot firing ball number counter is “1000” or more. If the total number of shot balls is “100,000” or more (YES in S2665), the process proceeds to step S2666. On the other hand, if it is not “100,000” or more (NO in S2665), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter in the special memory 89 is “3000” or more (S2667). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations since the power is first turned on for this pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached “3000”. If it is “3000” or more (YES in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2666. In step S2666, data information D [0... 7] for displaying “1” is output. That is, data information D [0... 7] = D [01100000] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2669), “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340. In this way, in this embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, the displayed base (normal base, short-time base, jackpot base) is effectively converged to some extent by the person who confirms the base. Make sure that it is a value.

  On the other hand, if the total number of shot balls is less than “100000” (NO in S2665) and the value of the variation counter is less than “3000” (NO in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2668. In step S2668, data information D [0... 7] for displaying “0” is output. That is, data information D [0... 7] = [11111100] is output. When the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2669), “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340. Thus, in this embodiment, if “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, the displayed base (normal base, short-time base, jackpot base) is still converged to the person who confirms the base. Let them know that it is a reference value that may not exist. After step S2669, the common flag is switched to “1” (S2670), and this process ends.

  As described above, according to the modification of the first embodiment, the base can be confirmed on the base display 300. In particular, the base can be confirmed for each gaming state, such as a normal base (base in the normal gaming state), a short-time base (base in the short-time state), and a jackpot base (base in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, it is possible to correctly determine the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the base. If it is a normal base, for example, if it is in the range of 30% to 39%, it may be judged as being within the normal range. For example, if it is a jackpot base, for example, if it is in the range of 600% to 800%, it may be determined as being within the normal range. Since the operational effects of the other modified examples are merely based on the output rate with respect to the operational effects of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the clear image showing the characters “Special memory cleared” on the display screen 7a. CL1 was displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 62C, a clear image CL3 indicating the characters “base initialized” is displayed on the display screen 7a. good. At this time, a special sound indicating that the base has been initialized may be output from the speaker 67. Alternatively, a predetermined lamp (frame lamp 66 or panel lamp 5) may emit light in a special light emission mode.

<Second form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The special memory 89 of the first embodiment is a volatile storage means (DRAM). On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the special memory 89A is a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM). The special memory 89A may be a non-volatile storage unit other than the EEPROM, and may be a flash memory, for example. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  In the special memory 89A of the second form, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), a storage area for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball number storage area, a bonus prize ball number storage area, and a continuous bonus prize ball A number storage area and a variation count storage area are provided. The storage area for 100 balls stores the value of the counter for 100 balls that has been measured until the time of power interruption. The actual total award ball number storage area stores the value of the actual total award ball number counter measured up to the time of power failure. The prize winning ball storage area stores the value of the prize winning ball counter that has been measured by the time of the power interruption. The consecutive-competition-prize ball number storage area stores the value of the continuous-competition-prize ball counter that has been measured up to the time of power interruption. The fluctuation count storage area stores the value of the fluctuation count counter that has been measured before the power interruption. Each of these values (hereinafter referred to as “measurement rate display measurement value”) is stored in the special memory 89A for the following reason.

  As described above, the backup power can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 to the special memory 89 (volatile storage means) of the first embodiment. The stored contents can be held. However, it is conceivable that even a backup power supply cannot be supplied to the special memory 89 due to disconnection or contact failure, and the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased. In addition, if the power plug 160 (see FIG. 7) is intentionally pulled out and the power is cut off for several days, the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, a special memory (nonvolatile memory) 89A, which is a nonvolatile storage means, is provided to deal with the above-described problem, and the output rate display measurement value is stored in the special memory 89A when power is interrupted. I have to. As a result, even if backup power is not supplied, it is possible to avoid erasing the stored content (measurement value for display rate) of the special memory 89A. Thereby, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to restart the measurement from the measured value for output rate display stored immediately before the occurrence of power interruption.

  Here, a method of directly storing (storing) in the special memory 89 </ b> A every time the measurement value for the rate display is measured can be considered. However, in the case of this method, access to the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage means, is frequent, and the special memory 89A deteriorates quickly. That is, the non-volatile storage means cannot cope with high-frequency reading / writing like the volatile storage means.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage means, is added to a counter for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball counter, and an award winning prize number There are provided a counter, a consecutive winning prize ball counter, a variation counter, a winning ratio storage area, and a continuous winning ratio storage area. As a result, during normal times when power interruption has not occurred (when the monitored voltage is greater than 17V), the game RAM 84A is accessed even if the output rate display measurement value is measured. The memory 89A is not accessed. Therefore, the use frequency (deterioration) of the special memory 89A can be suppressed.

  Then, only when power is cut off, the measured value for displaying the output rate measured so far is transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the counter for 100 balls of the game RAM 84A, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the value of the prize prize ball number counter, the value of the consecutive prize prize ball number counter, and the value of the variation counter Are stored in the storage area for 100 balls of the special memory 89A, the actual total prize ball number storage area, the bonus game prize ball number storage area, the continuous bonus game prize ball number storage area, and the variation count memory area, respectively. Thus, even if an abnormal situation occurs in which a disconnection, a contact failure, or an intentional interruption of power occurs for several days, it is possible to avoid erasing the output rate display measurement value.

  If the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are all cleared when the power is turned on thereafter (power recovery), the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. It has become. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement can be resumed from the measurement value for the output rate display stored at the time of power interruption. On the other hand, if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are not cleared when the power is turned on, the percentage display measurement values stored in the game RAM 84A (the value of the counter for the 100 balls, the value of the actual total winning ball counter, The value of the winning ball counter, the value of the consecutive feature winning ball counter, and the value of the fluctuation counter are stored in the special memory 89A. Value, a value stored in the prize winning ball storage area, a value stored in the consecutive prize winning ball storage area, and a value stored in the variation count storage area).

  And if the above-mentioned collation result is coincident, it is determined that the measurement value for the rate display stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the measurement value for the rate display. On the other hand, if the result of the above collation does not match, it is determined that the measured value for the rate display stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and the rate display stored in the special memory 89A is displayed. The measured value is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the measured rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A that is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether or not the measured value for the rate display stored in the game RAM 84A is normal.

  [Power-On Process] In the second power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 75, steps S026, S024 are replaced with steps S021 to S024 in the first power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. S027 is provided. As shown in FIG. 75, the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S026 through steps S019 and S020 when clearing all information stored in the game RAM 84A in step S018. In step S026, the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A, and the process proceeds to step S025. Thereby, even if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are erased when the power is turned on, the measurement can be resumed from the measured value for the rate display that is transferred to the special memory 89A when the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate as a converged value.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values in the gaming RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S027 via steps S016 and S017. In step S027, the measured rate display value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is compared with the measured rate display measured value stored in the special memory 89A. If the values of the measured values for display of the respective rates match (YES in S027), it is determined that the measured values for display of the rate stored in the game RAM 84A are normal, and the process does not proceed to step S026. Proceed to step S025. On the other hand, if even one of the percentage display measurement values does not match (NO in S027), it is determined that the percentage display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is abnormal. Then, the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the measured value for the rate display stored in the special memory 89A by performing the double check of the check sum of the gaming RAM 84A and the verification of the measured value for the rate display. It is.

  [Prize Ball Counter Addition Processing] In the second form prize ball number counter addition processing (S114) shown in FIG. 76, steps S201 to S204 of the first form prize ball number counter addition processing (S114) shown in FIG. Steps S210 to S213, S215, S216, and S218 are provided instead of S206, S207, and S209. Steps S201 to S204, S206, S207, and S209 of the first form are processes related to each counter (see FIG. 11C) provided in the special memory 89, whereas steps S210 to S213 of the second form are performed. S215, S216, and S218 are processes related to each counter (see FIG. 74A) provided in the gaming RAM 84A. Since only the above points are changed with respect to the winning ball number counter addition processing (S114) of the first embodiment, detailed description is omitted.

  [Power-off monitoring process] In the power-off monitoring process (S108) of the second form shown in FIG. 77, step S2908 is replaced with steps S2904 and S2905 of the power-off monitoring process (S108) of the first form shown in FIG. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 77, if a power-off signal is input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), game controlling microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2908 via steps S2902 and S2903. In step S2908, the output rate display measurement values measured by the respective counters provided in the game RAM 84A up to the time of power interruption are transferred (copied) to the respective storage areas (see FIG. 74 (B)) provided in the special memory 89A. ) In this way, when the power is cut off, the measurement value for the rate display is held in the special memory 89A.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by storing the output rate display measurement value in the special memory 89A that is a non-volatile storage means at the time of power interruption, by any chance, backup power is not supplied. However, it is possible to avoid that the measurement value for the rate display is deleted. Then, when the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to transfer the measured rate display value stored in the special memory 89A at the previous power interruption to the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the measured value for the rate display stored at the time of power interruption.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second form, in the normal time when the power interruption does not occur, the measured output rate display measurement value is stored in the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. Only in some cases, the measured rate display value is stored (transferred) in the special memory 89A which is a nonvolatile storage means. Accordingly, since the special memory 89A is not frequently accessed, the output rate is displayed in an abnormal situation in which disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power interruption occurs for several days while suppressing the use frequency (deterioration) of the special memory 89A. It is possible to avoid that the measured values are deleted. Other functions and effects of the second embodiment are substantially the same as the functions and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. In the second embodiment, at the time of power interruption, each value (measurement value for output rate display) measured for calculating the output rate is stored in the special memory 89A which is a nonvolatile storage means. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, each value (base display measurement value) measured for calculating the base at the time of power interruption is stored in the special memory 89A which is a nonvolatile storage means. It is supposed to let you.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (B), the special memory 89A of the modified example of the second embodiment includes a normal 100-ball storage area, a normal firing ball number storage area, a normal total winning ball number storage area, and a time reduction of 100. Sphere storage area, hour and hour firing ball number storage area, hour and hour total prize ball number storage area, jackpot 100 ball storage area, jackpot launch ball number storage area, jackpot total prize ball number storage area, and number of changes A storage area is provided.

  The normal storage area for 100 balls stores the value of the counter for normal 100 balls that has been measured until the time of power interruption. The normal firing ball number storage area stores the value of the normal firing ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The normal total award ball number storage area stores the value of the normal total award ball number counter that has been measured up to the time of power failure. The time-short 100-ball storage area stores the value of the time-short 100-ball counter that has been measured before power interruption. The short-time firing ball number storage area stores the value of the short-time firing ball number counter that has been measured before the power interruption. The short-time total award ball number storage area stores the value of the short-time total award ball number counter that has been measured before the power interruption. The jackpot 100 ball storage area stores the value of the jackpot 100 ball counter measured until the time of power interruption. The jackpot firing ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot firing ball number counter measured until the time of power interruption. The jackpot total winning ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot total winning ball counter that has been measured before the power failure. The variation count storage area stores the value of the variation count counter measured until the time of power interruption, as in the second embodiment. Each of these values (hereinafter referred to as “measurement value for base display”) is stored in the special memory 89A for the same reason as that for storing the output rate display measurement value in the special memory 89A in the second embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted as appropriate.

  In the modification of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), a gaming RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage means, is added to a normal 100 ball counter, a normal firing ball number counter, Prize ball counter, normal base storage area, hour and hour 100 counter, hour and hour shot total counter, hour and hour total base ball counter, hour and hour base storage area, jackpot 100 ball counter, jackpot launch ball counter, jackpot total prize ball A number counter, a jackpot base storage area, and a variation counter are provided. As a result, during normal times when no power interruption occurs (when the monitored voltage is greater than 17V), the game RAM 84A is accessed even if the base display measurement value is measured. It does not access 89A. Therefore, the use frequency (deterioration) of the special memory 89A can be suppressed.

  Then, only when the power is cut off, the base display measurement value measured so far is transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the normal 100 ball counter, the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the normal total winning ball number counter, the value of the hourly 100 ball counter, and the value of the hourly short shot number counter of the gaming RAM 84A And the value of the short-time total prize-ball counter, the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter, the value of the jackpot-fired ball counter, the value of the jackpot-total prize-ball counter, and the value of the variation counter 89A normal 100-ball storage area, normal firing ball number storage area, normal total award ball number storage area, short-time 100-ball storage area, short-time launch ball number storage area, short-time total award ball storage area, jackpot 100 balls The data is stored in the storage area, the jackpot firing ball number storage area, the jackpot total prize ball number storage area, and the variation count storage area. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the measurement value for base display being erased even if an abnormal situation occurs in which disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power interruption occurs for several days.

  When all the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are cleared when the power is turned on thereafter (when power is restored), the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. It has become. That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement can be resumed from the base display measurement value stored at the time of power interruption. On the other hand, if the stored content of the game RAM 84A is not cleared when the power is turned on, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is compared with the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A.

  If the result of the above collation is coincident, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the base display measurement value. On the other hand, if the result of the above collation does not match, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and the output rate display stored in the special memory 89A is displayed. The measured value is transferred (copied) to the gaming RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A that is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, the measurement can be resumed while checking whether or not the base display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is normal.

  [Power-On Processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the modified example of the second mode shown in FIG. 79, instead of step S027, the power-on processing (S001) of the second mode shown in FIG. Step S028 is provided. If it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values in the gaming RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S028 via steps S016 and S017. In step S028, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is compared with the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A. If the base display measurement values match each other (YES in S028), it is determined that the percentage display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal, and the process proceeds to step S026 without proceeding to step S026. Proceed to S025. On the other hand, if even one of the base display measurement values does not match (NO in S028), it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is abnormal, and is special. The base display measurement value stored in the memory 89A is transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to determine whether or not to use the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by performing a double check of the checksum verification of the game RAM 84A and the base display measurement value verification. .

  In the modification of the first embodiment, the counter addition process (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed as the process of adding each counter provided in the special memory 89. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, as the process of adding the counters provided in the gaming RAM 84A, a process substantially similar to the counter addition process (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed. ing. Further, in the power supply monitoring process (S108) of the second mode, the output rate display measurement value is transferred (copied) to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A in step S2908. On the other hand, in the power-off monitoring process (S108) of the modified example of the second embodiment, the base display measurement value is transferred to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A instead of the process in step S2908. It is like that.

  As described above, according to the modification of the second embodiment, by storing the base display measurement value in the special memory 89A that is a nonvolatile storage means at the time of power interruption, even if backup power is not supplied, It is possible to avoid erasing the base display measurement value. When the power is subsequently turned on, the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A at the previous power interruption can be transferred to the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. As a result, measurement can be restarted from the same value as the base display measurement value stored at the time of power interruption. Since the operational effects of the other modified examples are merely based on the output rate with respect to the operational effects of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Third form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the output rate indicator 300 of the first form is arranged on the main control board 80. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the output rate indicator 300 is arranged in the rear case 401A of the main board case 400A as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (A), the third mode output rate indicator 300 is integrally attached to the lower left part of the rear case 401A, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC1. ing. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the lighting control of the turnout indicator 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81. Here, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the third aspect ratio display device 300 is arranged in parallel to the mounting surface (rear surface) 80a of the main control board 80 and faces the integrated circuit IC9. It is in. Therefore, the output rate indicator 300 hinders the view of the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a, and it is particularly difficult to confirm the product number of the integrated circuit IC. The mounting surface 80a is a plate surface of the main control board 80 on which a large number of integrated circuits such as the game control microcomputer 81 and the integrated circuit IC9 are mounted.

  Therefore, in the third embodiment, the rear case 401A to which the output rate indicator 300 is attached is configured to be movable. Specifically, the rear case 401A is rotatably supported on the left end upper portion of the front case 402A via the rotation pin P1 on the left end upper portion. The rear case 401A is rotatably supported by the lower part on the left end side of the front case 402A via the rotation pin P2 at the lower part on the left end side. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 80A, 80B, and 80C, the rear case 401A can rotate around the rotation axis Q1 extending in the vertical direction on the left end side. In other words, the output rate indicator 300 is rotatable so as to reduce the area facing the mounting surface 80a. When the rear case 401A rotates to the position shown in FIG. 80C, the output rate indicator 300 is in a non-opposing position that does not face the entire mounting surface 80a. In the third embodiment, the rear case 401A and the rotation pins P1, P2 correspond to the moving mechanism unit.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), (B), and (C), the output rate indicator 300 is moved with respect to the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left lower portion of the mounting surface 80a from being hidden by the output rate indicator 300. Further, by not arranging the output rate indicator 300 on the main control board 80, the components on the main control board 80 must be brought close to ensure the arrangement space for the output rate indicator 300 as in the first embodiment. It is possible to solve the problem that does not become.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a structure that allows the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a to be seen can be easily realized by the rotation mechanism using the rear case 401A and the rotation pins P1 and P2. Then, the output ratio indicator 300 is rotated from a facing position (see FIG. 80A) facing the integrated circuit IC9 to a non-facing position (see FIG. 80C) not facing the entire mounting surface 80a. Can do. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the integrated circuit IC9 can be ensured, and the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be secured. The other functions and effects of the third embodiment are substantially the same as the operations and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a first modification of the third embodiment will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 81 (A), the output rate indicator 300 is attached to the lower left part of the rear case 401B of the main board case 400B, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC2. . The rear case 401B is rotatably supported on the left end upper portion of the front case 402B via the rotation pin P3 at the left end upper portion. The rear side case 401B is rotatably supported on the right end side upper portion of the front side case 402B via the rotation pin P4 at the upper right end side.

  Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 81 (A), (B), and (C), the rear case 401B can rotate around the rotation axis Q2 extending in the left-right direction on the upper end side. By rotating the rear case 401B, the output rate indicator 300 is not opposed to the entire mounting surface 80a from the opposed position (see FIG. 81A) facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 81A). (See (C)). In the first modification, the rear case 401A and the rotation pins P3 and P4 correspond to the moving mechanism unit. As described above, the third embodiment described above and the first modification mainly differ only in the rotation direction of the rear cases 401A and 401B. Accordingly, the operational effects of the first modification are substantially the same as the operational effects of the third embodiment described above, and a description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a second modification of the third embodiment will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 82 (A), the output rate indicator 300 is attached to the lower left part of the rear case 401C of the main board case 400C, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC3. . The lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear side case 401C is placed on the upper side of the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front side case 402C and is slidable (slidable) in the left-right direction.

  However, the upper portion of the left end surface of the rear case 401C is locked to an upper locking piece 402a provided at the upper left portion of the front case 402C. The lower portion of the left end surface of the rear case 401C is locked to a lower locking piece 402b provided in the lower left portion of the front case 402C. These latches restrict the sliding of the rear case 401C in the left-right direction. On the other hand, if these locks are released, the lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear case 401C can slide to the left with respect to the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front case 402C as shown in FIG. In the second modification, the rear case 401C and the front case 402C correspond to the moving mechanism unit.

  According to the second modification of the third embodiment, it is possible to easily realize a structure in which the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a can be seen by the slide mechanism using the rear case 401C and the front case 402C. Then, the output ratio indicator 300 is moved leftward from the facing position (see FIG. 82A) facing the integrated circuit IC9 to the non-facing position (see FIG. 82B) not facing the entire mounting surface 80a. Can be slid. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the integrated circuit IC9 can be ensured, and the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be secured. Since the other effect of the 2nd modification is substantially the same as the effect of the 3rd form mentioned above, explanation is omitted.

  Next, a third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 83 (A), the output rate indicator 300 is attached to the lower left portion of the rear case 401D of the main board case 400D, and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC4. . The left end 401Da of the rear case 401D fits in an uneven shape with respect to the left end 402Da of the front case 402D, and can slide (slide) in the vertical direction. Further, the right end portion 401Db of the rear side case 401D fits in an uneven shape with respect to the right end portion 402Db of the front side case 402D, and is slidable in the vertical direction.

  However, the lower surface of the left end 401Da of the rear case 401D is locked to a left locking piece 402c provided below the left end 402Da of the front case 402D. Further, the lower surface of the right end portion 401Db of the rear case 401D is locked to a right locking piece 402d provided on the lower side of the right end portion 402Db of the front case 402D. By these locking, the sliding of the rear case 401D in the vertical direction is restricted. On the other hand, when these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the left end 401Da and the right end 401Db of the rear case 401D are in contact with the left end 402Da and the right end 402Db of the front case 402D. It can slide up and down. In the third modification, the rear case 401D and the front case 402D correspond to the moving mechanism unit. As described above, the second modification example and the third modification example described above mainly differ only in the sliding direction of the rear cases 401C and 401D. Therefore, the operational effects of the third modification are substantially the same as the operational effects of the second modification described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The third embodiment (see FIG. 80), the first modification of the third embodiment (see FIG. 81), the second modification of the third embodiment (see FIG. 82), and the third modification of the third embodiment. In the example (see FIG. 83), the output rate indicator 300 is configured to be movable. However, instead of the output rate indicator 300, the base indicator 300 as described in the modification of the first form or the modification of the second form may be configured to be movable. The operational effect in this case is merely a change in the output rate with respect to the operational effect of the above-described third embodiment or each modification thereof, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<4th form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the said 1st form, as shown in FIG. 7, it was made possible to display a rate on the rate display 300 as a component with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, an external rate display device (external device) 900 that is not a constituent part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display the rate. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 84A, the external output rate display device 900 includes a display unit 910, a changeover switch 920, a connection cable 930, and a connector CN4. The display unit 910 is configured by a so-called quadruple 7-segment having four lighting areas, as in the above-described output rate indicator 300. The changeover switch 920 switches between the ON state and the OFF state of the external ratio display device 900. The connection cable 930 includes a connector CN4 at one end, and is a flexible cable having a certain length so that the connector CN4 can be easily connected. The connector CN4 is connected to a connector CN3 provided on the main control board 80 described later.

  In the fourth embodiment, the output rate display signal is output to the external output rate display device 900 by a connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80. The output rate display signal is a signal for causing the external output rate display device 900 to display the output rate. The connector CN3 is a dedicated connector provided separately from each connector provided on the existing main control board 80. However, an existing connector may be used so that the output rate display signal is output from the connector.

  As shown in FIG. 84B, the connector CN4 of the external output rate display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80, and the external output rate display device 900 is turned on by operating the changeover switch 920. . Thereby, an output rate display signal is output from the main control board 80 to the external output rate display device 900 via the connector CN3. As a result, the external rate display device 900 to which the rate display signal is input is similar to the first mode in the four lighting areas of the display unit 910 (see FIG. 26), and the rate and the displayed rate are displayed. It is possible to indicate whether it is a ratio of a feature or a ratio of consecutive features, and whether a displayed output rate is a valid value or a reference value.

  As shown in FIG. 85, a serial communication circuit 170 is provided on the main control board 80. The serial communication circuit 170 is for serial communication with the external rate display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. The external output rate display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. With these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit an output rate display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external output rate display device 900 by serial communication.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the drive circuit 200F of the fourth embodiment is configured in the same manner as an existing drive circuit that displays game information. That is, a circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not newly added like the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). This is because the circuit unit for displaying the output rate is provided in the external output rate display device 900. Therefore, the output rate can be displayed on the external output rate display device 900 without changing the design of the existing drive circuit 200F that displays game information.

  [Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the fourth form shown in FIG. 87, steps S123 and S124 are newly provided in comparison with the input processing (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines that it is not a winning detection signal in step S111 (NO in S111), the process proceeds to step S123. In step S123, it is determined whether or not a connection signal is input from the external output rate display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170. The connection signal is a signal output from the external ratio display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external ratio display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If a connection signal has been input (YES in S123), serial communication circuit setting processing for causing the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external output rate display device 900 is executed (S124), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if the connection signal is not input (NO in S123), step S124 is passed and the process proceeds to step S122.

  [Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the fourth mode shown in FIG. 88, first, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game display process (S2303, see FIG. 53). In other words, in the output process (S107) in the fourth form, unlike the output process (S107) in the first form shown in FIG. Since this is not the case, the game display process (S2303) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to display game information on the game display 40 while displaying the rate on the external rate display device 900. After step S2303, it is determined whether the connection signal described above is input (S2315). If not input (NO in S2315), the process proceeds to step S2305.

  On the other hand, if it is input (YES in S2315), signal output processing is executed (S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2305. In the signal output process (S2316), an output rate display signal is output to the connector CN3 via the serial communication circuit 170. This outgoing rate display signal is stored in information (specifically, in an accessory rate storage area) of the outgoing rate (a ratio of an accessory, a continuous accessory ratio) calculated by an outgoing rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47). And the value stored in the continuous character ratio storage area), information on the value of the variation counter, information on the value of the actual total prize ball counter, and the like. Thereby, the external rate display device 900 connected to the connector CN3 is based on the input rate display signal, and the display unit 910 has either a rate, a combination rate or a continuous combination rate. It is possible to indicate whether it is an effective value or a reference value.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the rate can be confirmed by displaying the rate on the display unit 910 of the external rate display device 900. Is possible. Further, the connector CN4 of the external output rate display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 only when confirming the output rate. When the output rate is not confirmed, the external output rate display is performed as shown in FIG. The connector CN4 of the device 900 can be removed from the connector CN3. That is, unlike the first embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not always provided with the rate indicator 300 for displaying the rate. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration capable of confirming the exit rate with a small design change with respect to an existing pachinko gaming machine.

  In short, since it is not necessary to arrange the output rate indicator 300 and the circuit unit for displaying the output rate on the main control board 80, the arrangement space for bringing the parts on the main control board 80 together as in the first embodiment. It is possible to solve the problem that must be secured. In addition, providing the rate indicator 300 for all pachinko machines increases the cost, but if only the connector CN3 is provided as in the fourth embodiment, the increase in cost can be suppressed. It is. That is, when confirming the turnout rate, it is only necessary to confirm one pachinko gaming machine one by one, and it is not necessary to confirm a plurality of pachinko gaming machines simultaneously. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prepare one external rate display device 900 for the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 of the fourth form, and therefore it can be implemented at low cost. Since the external output rate display device 900 is an external device, many types (variations) can be prepared as external devices.

  Further, according to the fourth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the output rate display signal includes information on the output rate (combination rate, continuous feature rate) calculated by the rate calculation process (S117). . That is, the odds ratio is not calculated by the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the odds ratio is not calculated by the external ratio display device 900. Therefore, it is possible to implement with a device having only a display function without preparing a special device capable of calculating the output rate as an external device.

  Also, according to the fourth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 85, the main control board 80 includes the serial communication circuit 170, so that the external rate display device connected to the connector CN3 by serial communication. It is possible to display the output rate at 900. Therefore, the number of wirings (signals) for displaying the output rate can be reduced as compared with the case where the output rate is displayed on the external output rate display device 900 by parallel communication. That is, it is possible to reduce the design change for the main control board 80 by reducing the number of wirings connecting the main control board 80 and the external output ratio display device 900.

  In the fourth embodiment, the output rate display signal includes the information on the output rate (composition ratio, continuous feature ratio) calculated by the output rate calculation process (S117). However, it may be changed as follows. In other words, the payout rate display signal does not include information on the payout rate, but the information of the actual total prize ball number counter (total prize ball number) and the value of the prize prize ball counter (number of winning prize balls) And information on the value of the consecutive winning award ball counter (the number of consecutive winning award balls). In this case, when the external rate display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the rate display signal, information on the total number of winning balls, information on the number of winning winning balls, and information on the number of consecutive winning winning balls Based on the above, the output rate is calculated. Then, the external output rate display device displays the calculated output rate on the display unit. In this way, unlike the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not calculate the outage rate, and the burden of control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 can be reduced. That is, it is possible not to provide the exit rate calculation process (117).

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described based on FIG. In the said 4th form, the external output rate display apparatus (external device) 900 which is not a component with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided can display the output rate. On the other hand, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, an external base display device (external device) 900 that is not a constituent part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display the base. The external base display device 900 has the same hardware configuration as the above-described external output rate display device 900 (see FIG. 84), and is simply a name change.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, a base display signal is output to the external base display device 900 by a connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80. The base display signal is a signal for displaying the base on the external base display device 900. This base display signal includes information on the normal base, time base, and jackpot base calculated by the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) and is counted by the counter addition process (S161, FIG. 67). Information on the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot firing ball number counter is included. Furthermore, information on the value of the fluctuation counter is also included.

  Thus, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the connector CN4 (see FIG. 84B) of the external base display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80, so that the main control board 80 and the connector CN3 are connected. A base display signal may be output to the external base display device 900. As a result, the external base display device 900 to which the base display signal is input has a base, a base that is displayed in the four lighting areas of the display unit 910 (see FIG. 84B), a normal base, a time-short base, It is possible to indicate which is the jackpot base and whether the displayed base is a valid value or a reference value.

  The main control board 80 is provided with the serial communication circuit 170 (see FIG. 85) as described in the fourth embodiment. The serial communication circuit 170 is for serial communication with the external base display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. The external base display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. With these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit a base display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external base display device 900 by serial communication.

  [Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the fourth mode shown in FIG. 89, steps S158 and S159 are newly provided in comparison with the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the first mode shown in FIG. It has been. As shown in FIG. 89, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S150 that it is not a ball entry detection signal (NO in S150), it proceeds to step S158. In step S158, it is determined whether or not a connection signal is input from the external base display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170. The connection signal is a signal output from the external base display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external base display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If a connection signal has been input (YES in S158), serial communication circuit setting processing for causing the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external base display device 900 is executed (S159), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if a connection signal is not input (NO in S158), step S159 is passed and the process proceeds to step S122.

  As described above, according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, the base can be confirmed by displaying the base on the display unit 910 of the external base display device 900 (see FIG. 84B). Further, the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 can be connected to the connector CN3 only when the base is confirmed, and the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 can be detached from the connector CN3 when the base is not confirmed. Yes (see FIG. 84A). Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration capable of confirming the base with a small design change with respect to the existing pachinko gaming machine. Since the operational effects of the other modified examples are obtained by changing the output rate to the base with respect to the operational effects of the fourth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the base display signal includes information on the normal base, the short-time base, and the jackpot base calculated by the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68). However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the base display signal does not include the base information, and the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the number of jackpot fired balls counted by the counter addition process (S161, see FIG. 67). In addition to the counter value information, a normal total prize ball number counter value, a short time total prize ball number counter value, and a jackpot total prize ball number counter value are included. In this case, when the external base display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the base display signal, the base (normal base, short-time base, jackpot base) is calculated based on the values of the counters described above. Then, the external base display device displays the calculated base on the display unit. In this way, unlike the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not calculate the base, and it is possible to reduce the burden of control processing by the game control microcomputer 81. That is, it is possible not to provide the base calculation process (S152).

<5th form>
A fifth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, even when the rate is not displayed on the rate display 300, the rate displayed before is displayed on the rate display 300 as it is. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the rate is not displayed on the rate display 300, "----" is displayed on the rate display 300 as shown in FIG. Yes. That is, the rate lighting unit LB7 is turned on in the first lighting region 310, the rate lighting unit LB15 is turned on in the second lighting region 320, and the rate lighting unit LB23 is turned on in the third lighting region 330, In the fourth lighting region 340, the lighting ratio lighting unit LB31 is lit. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  [Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the fifth mode shown in FIG. 91, steps S2311, S2312, and S2313 are newly provided in comparison with the output processing (S107) of the first mode shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 undergoes a rate display process. (S2304), the change completion flag is turned OFF (S2311). The change completion flag indicates that the display of “----” is completed on the output rate indicator 300 as will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301), or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the rate is not displayed on the rate display 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), a display change process to be described later is executed in order to display “----” on the output rate indicator 300 (S2313). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES in S2312), the display of “----” is completed on the rate display 300, so the game display process is executed as described above (S2303). .

  [Display Change Process] As shown in FIG. 92, in the display change process (S2313), it is first determined whether or not the change flag is “1” (S2801). The change flag is set to a value of “1”, “2”, “3”, or “4”, and any one of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output rate indicator 300 is turned on. This indicates whether “-” is displayed in the area. If the change flag is “1” (YES in S2801), data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2802), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to “ Switch to “H” (S2803). Subsequently, in order to display “-”, data information D [0... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2804), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to “H”. (S2805). As a result, in the first lighting region 310, only the output rate lighting part LB7 is lit and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to “2” (S2806), and this process ends.

  If the change flag is not “1” in step S2801, it is subsequently determined whether or not the change flag is “2” (S2807). If the change flag is “2” (YES in S2807), data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2808), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to “ Switch to “H” (S2809). Subsequently, in order to display “-”, data information D [0... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2810), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to “H”. (S2811). As a result, in the second lighting region 320, only the lighting ratio lighting unit LB15 is lit, and “-” is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to “3” (S2812), and this process ends.

  If the change flag is not “2” in step S2807, it is then determined whether or not the change flag is “3” (S2813). If the change flag is “3” (YES in S2813), data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 (S2814), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to “ Switch to “H” (S2815). Subsequently, in order to display “-”, data information D [0... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2816), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to “H”. (S2817). As a result, in the third lighting region 330, only the lighting portion for lighting rate LB23 is lit and “-” is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to “4” (S2818), and this process ends.

  If the change flag is not “3” in step S2813, the change flag is “4”, and the process advances to step S2819. In step S2819, data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to “H” (S2820). Subsequently, in order to display “-”, data information D [0... 7] = D [00000010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S2821), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to “H”. (S2822). Thereby, in the 4th lighting area | region 340, only the ratio lighting part LB31 lights, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change completion flag is set to ON (S2823), the change flag is set to “1” (S2824), and this process ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is opened and the customer is waiting is satisfied, the first lighting area 310 of the rate indicator 300 is satisfied. And the aspect of the 2nd lighting area | region 320 (display area | region) becomes a numerical aspect (for example, "60", refer FIG. 26) which shows an output rate. Thereby, it is possible to confirm the exit rate. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (while the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the rate indicator 300 becomes “-” (non-numeric mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the exit rate is not displayed. In this way, while the game is in progress, it is possible to avoid misrecognizing that the present rate is the current rate because the rate at which the display condition was satisfied is displayed as it is. In particular, even when the gaming machine frame 50 is opened and the rate indicator 300 is viewed, the special symbol is still being displayed, or the game ball has entered the start ports 20 and 21 and the game has continued. Is possible. At this time, it is possible to prevent a person who confirms the exit rate from judging whether the rate is abnormal or not based on the exit rate that has been displayed.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, during the execution of the special symbol variation display or during the control to the big hit game state (when in the game control state), the rate display is not performed. The mode of the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the device 300 is set to “-”. That is, when the rate is not displayed on the rate display 300, a wasteful control process of calculating the rate is not performed. And in the game control state, the burden of control processing is greater than in the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) by not performing the calculation and display of the turnout rate in the game control state where the burden of the control processing is heavy. It is. The other functions and effects of the fifth embodiment are substantially the same as the functions and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the display condition is not satisfied (the rate display process (S2304) is not executed), as shown in FIG. 90, a display area (first lighting area 310 and “-” Is displayed in the second lighting region 320). However, if it can be recognized that the output rate is not displayed, a display mode other than “-” may be used and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display area in which the output rate can be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which each output rate lighting part is turned off), and a predetermined specification such as “77” It is good also as a numerical aspect (an aspect different from the numerical aspect which shows an outgoing rate).

<Modification of Fifth Mode>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when the rate is not displayed on the rate display 300, “----” is displayed on the rate display 300 (see FIG. 90). On the other hand, in the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the base is not displayed on the base display 300, “----” is displayed on the base display 300.

  [Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the modified example of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 93, steps S2311, S2312, and S2313 are newly added to the output processing (S107) of the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 93, if the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 undergoes base display processing ( In step S2340, the change completion flag is turned off (S2311). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the base is not displayed on the base display 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), the display change process described above is executed in order to display “----” on the base display 300 (see S2313, FIG. 92). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES in S2312), since the display of “----” is completed on the base display 300, the game display process is executed as described above (S2303).

  As described above, according to the modification of the fifth embodiment, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting is satisfied, the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 310 of the base display 300 The mode of the lighting region 320 (display region) is a numerical mode indicating the base. Thereby, it is possible to confirm the base. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (while the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the base indicator 300 becomes “-” (non-numeric mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the base is not displayed. In this way, while the game is in progress, it is possible to avoid misrecognizing that the base is the current base when the display condition is satisfied and remains displayed. Since the operational effects of the other modified examples are merely obtained by changing the output rate with respect to the operational effects of the fifth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the modification of the fifth embodiment, when the display condition is not satisfied (the base display process (S2340) is not executed), the display area (the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320) in which the base can be displayed. “-” Is displayed on the screen. However, if it can be recognized that the base is not displayed, the display mode may be other than “-”, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display area in which the base can be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which the display is turned off), and a specific number mode (a number indicating the base) that is predetermined as “77”. It is good also as an aspect different from an aspect.

<Sixth form>
A sixth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first form, the output rate indicator 300 displays that the ratio of the feature does not exceed 70% (70%) or that the ratio of the continuous feature does not exceed 60% (60%). It comes to confirm by rate. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, it is confirmed by the light emission mode of the special LED 350 that the ratio of the accessory does not exceed 70% or that the ratio of the continuous accessory does not exceed 60%. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 94, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means, light emission means) 350 is arranged on the main control board 80 and can change the light emission mode. The game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 has the special LED 350 in the light-off mode shown in FIG. 94 (A), the light-up mode (first light-emission mode) shown in FIG. 94 (B), and FIG. It is possible to switch to the blinking mode (second light emitting mode) shown in FIG.

  In the sixth mode, when displaying the turnout rate, the total number of winning balls acquired from the time when the power is first turned on to the present time is less than 10,000 shots, and the special number from the time when the power is first turned on to the present time When the number of changes in which the symbol change display is executed is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off. Thereby, it is made for the person who saw special LED350 of the light extinction mode to grasp that there is a possibility that the output rate has not yet converged.

  In addition, when displaying the payout rate, if the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the ratio of bonuses does not exceed 70%, or the ratio of consecutive bonuses exceeds 60%. If not, the special LED 350 is turned on. As a result, the person who has seen the special LED 350 in the lighting mode is made aware that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with as a result of the exit rate converged to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the ratio of bonuses exceeds 70% (specified value) or the ratio of consecutive bonuses is 60% (specified value). If it exceeds, the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the flashing mode. As a result, the person who has seen the special LED 350 in the blinking mode is made aware of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illegally modified or malfunctioned as a result of the output rate converged to some extent.

  [Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the sixth form shown in FIG. 95, steps S2308, S2309, and S2310 are newly provided in comparison with the output processing (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 has a predetermined value stored in the gaming RAM 84. It is determined whether lighting mode data or blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). The lighting mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 to the lighting mode, and the blinking mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 to the flashing mode. If these data are set (YES in S2308), the light-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and the game display process is executed (S2303). The light-off mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 to the light-off mode. Thus, when displaying game information related to the progress of the game on the game display device 40, the special LED 350 is always in a light-off mode, and power consumption can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), after performing the exit rate display process (S2304), the special LED process is executed. (S2310).

  [Special LED Processing] As shown in FIG. 96, in the special LED processing (S2310), is the value of the actual total winning ball counter in the special memory 89 “100” or more (total winning ball number is 10,000 or more)? It is determined whether or not (S2701). If it is less than “100” (NO in S2701), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter in the special memory 89 is “3000” or more (S2702). If it is less than “3000” (NO in S2702), the extinction mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2708), and this process is terminated. Thus, when the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the actual total number of winning balls counter is “100” or more (YES in S2701) or the value of the variation counter is “3000” or more (YES in S2702), the display is continued. It is determined whether or not the flag is “1” (S2703). If it is “1” (YES in S2703), it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds “70” (S2704). If not exceeded (NO in S2704), lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2707), and this process is terminated. If the display flag is not “1” (NO in S2703), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous character ratio stored in the continuous character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds “60”. (S2705). If not exceeded (NO in S2705), lighting mode data is set (S2707), and this process is terminated. In this way, on the condition that the output rate is an effective value that has converged to some extent, the special LED 350 mode is changed to the lighting mode when the ratio of the feature does not exceed 70% or the continuous feature ratio does not exceed 60%. Become.

  On the other hand, if the value of the accessory ratio exceeds “70” in step S2704, or if the value of the continuous accessory ratio exceeds “60” in step S2705, a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 The flashing mode data is set to (S2706), and this processing is finished. Thus, on the condition that the rate of departure is an effective value that has converged to some extent, the special LED 350 mode changes to the flashing mode when the ratio of the bonuses exceeds 70% or the continuous bonus rate exceeds 60%. Become.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth form, when the bonus rate exceeds 70% or the continuous bonus rate exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 is switched from the lighting mode or the lighting mode to the flashing mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the turnout rate knows that the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode, and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simpler and more immediate than when checking the turnout rate with the turnout indicator 300. It is possible to determine that there has been an unauthorized modification or failure (confirming an abnormality in the output rate). In addition, if the special LED 350 is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been illegally modified or broken as a result of the convergence of the output rate to some extent. It is. On the other hand, if the special LED 350 is turned off, it can be easily and immediately determined that the output rate has not yet converged. The other functions and effects of the sixth embodiment are substantially the same as the operations and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment, it is confirmed in the light emission mode of the special LED 350 whether the output rate is within the normal range (the ratio of the accessory does not exceed 70% and the ratio of the continuous accessory does not exceed 60%). I did it. On the other hand, in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, whether the base is in the normal range is confirmed by the light emission mode of the special LED 350.

  Here, the case where the base is within the normal range will be described. In the modification of the sixth embodiment, if the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less, the normal base is within the normal range. If the time base is 84% or more and 99% or less, the time base is within the normal range. If the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less, the jackpot base is within the normal range. If any of the normal base, the short-time base, and the jackpot base is within the normal range, the base is determined to be within the normal range. On the other hand, if any one of the normal base, the short time base, and the jackpot base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), the base is determined to be out of the normal range.

  In addition, in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, when displaying the base (normal base, short-time base, jackpot base), the total number of shot balls since the power was turned on until now is less than 100,000 shots, and the power is turned on. If the number of changes in which the special symbol change display has been executed up to the present time is less than 3000 times, the special LED mode is turned off. Thereby, the person who has seen the special LED 350 in the extinguishing mode is made aware of the possibility that the base has not yet converged.

  When displaying the base, if the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, and the base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is turned on. Thereby, the person who has seen the special LED 350 in the lighting mode is made to know that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been illegally modified or broken as a result of the base converged to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, if the base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the flashing mode. As a result, the person who has seen the special LED 350 in the blinking mode is made to grasp that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illegally modified or broken as a result of convergence to some extent.

  [Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the sixth form shown in FIG. 97, steps S2308, S2309, and S2341 are newly provided in comparison with the output process (S107) of the modified example of the first form shown in FIG. ing. As shown in FIG. 97, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301), or if the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 has a predetermined value stored in the gaming RAM 84. It is determined whether lighting mode data or blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). If these data are set (YES in S2308), the light-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and the game display process is executed (S2303). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), after executing the base display process (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73), A special LED process to be described later is executed (S2341).

  [Special LED Process] As shown in FIG. 98, in the special LED process (S2341), the total number of shot balls (the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state, the number of shot balls in the short-time state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state) It is determined whether or not the total is 100000 or more (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot firing ball number counter is “1000” or more. If it is less than “100,000” (NO in S2710), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “3000” or more (S2711). If it is less than “3000” (NO in S2711), the extinction mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2715), and this process is terminated. Thus, when the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the total number of shot balls is “100000” or more (YES in S2710), or if the number of fluctuations is “3000” or more (YES in S2711), whether or not the base is within the normal range. Is determined (S2712). That is, the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less, the short-time base is 84% or more and 99% or less, and the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less. It is determined whether or not both conditions are satisfied. If the base is within the normal range (YES in S2712), lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2713), and the process is terminated. Thus, on the condition that the base is a value converged to some extent, when the base is within the normal range, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes the lighting mode.

  On the other hand, if the base is not within the normal range (NO in S2712), the blinking mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2714), and the process is terminated. Thus, on the condition that the base is a value that has converged to some extent, when the base is out of the normal range, the mode of the special LED 350 becomes the flashing mode.

  As described above, according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, when the base is out of the normal range from the normal range, the special LED 350 is switched from the lighting mode (or the lighting mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base recognizes that the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode, and therefore, it is easier and more improper for the pachinko gaming machine 1 than when confirming the base with the base display 300. It is possible to judge that a modification or failure has occurred (check for abnormalities in the base). If the special LED 350 is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been illegally modified or broken as a result of the base having converged to some extent. is there. On the other hand, if the special LED 350 is turned off, it can be easily and immediately determined that the base has not yet converged. Since the operational effects of the other modified examples are obtained by changing the output rate to the base with respect to the operational effects of the sixth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Seventh form>
A seventh form of pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sixth embodiment, after calculating the payout rate, it is notified whether or not the calculated payout rate (composition ratio or continuous character ratio) exceeds a specified value (70% or 60%). On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, even if the output rate is not calculated, it is notified whether the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value. The following description will focus on differences from the first and sixth embodiments.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the seventh embodiment, special LEDs (notifying means, abnormality notifying means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80 as in the sixth embodiment described above. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the special LED 350 as the extinguishing mode shown in FIG. 99 (A), the lighting mode (first mode) shown in FIG. 99 (B), and the blinking shown in FIG. 99 (C). It is possible to switch to the mode (second mode). In the seventh embodiment, the rate indicator 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the rate display process (S2304). Therefore, the drive circuit of the seventh form has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86) described above.

  Here, a method for determining whether the output rate exceeds a specified value (within a normal range) without calculating the output rate will be described. For example, when the total number of winning balls is 10,000 (the value of the actual total winning ball number counter is “100”), the ratio of the winning combination exceeds 70%. The situation is over 7000. Further, for example, when the total number of prize balls is 15,000, the ratio of bonuses exceeds 70% is the situation that the prize prize balls number exceeds 10500. Thus, when the total prize ball number is the predetermined determined total prize ball number (10000 shots and 15000 shots described above), the number of winning prize balls is the reference abnormal value (7000 shots and 10500 shots described above) ), It can be determined at that time whether the ratio of the items exceeds 70%. By using this point, in the seventh embodiment, it is determined whether or not the accessory ratio is substantially over 70% only by determining the size at a certain timing without sequentially calculating the accessory ratio. In the above description, the ratio of the actors has been described as an example.

  Thus, in the seventh embodiment, the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 100 is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81. As shown in FIG. 100, the simple abnormality determination table determines the value of the total prize ball number (determination total prize ball number) that becomes the determination timing and whether the bonus rate exceeds 70% at the determination timing. Value (abnormality judgment value) for the number of winning prizes for the purpose, and the value for the number of consecutive prizes for determining whether or not the ratio of the consecutive prizes exceeds 60% at the judgment timing (abnormal judgment) Value).

  With reference to this simple abnormality determination table, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the total number of winning balls has reached the determined total number of winning balls. If the determined total number of winning balls has been reached, it is further determined whether or not the number of winning prize balls exceeds a reference abnormal value, or whether or not the number of consecutive winning prize balls exceeds a reference abnormal value. It is like that. As a result, if the reference abnormal value is exceeded, the output rate (composition ratio, continuous feature ratio) exceeds the specified value (70%, 60%), and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the flashing mode. To do. On the other hand, if the reference abnormal value is not exceeded, the output rate does not exceed the specified value, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. In the seventh embodiment, the special LED 350 is turned off as the output rate value has not substantially converged until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000.

  [Input Process] In the output process (S101) of the seventh form shown in FIG. 101, step S127 is provided instead of steps S115 to S121 of the input process (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a simple ball number counter addition process in step S114, and then executes a simple abnormality determination process (S127).

  [Simple Abnormality Determination Processing] As shown in FIG. 102, in the simple abnormality determination processing (S127), first, the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 100 is referred to (S130). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current total number of winning balls has reached the determined total number of winning balls (10000, 15000, 20000, 25000 ...) (S131). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total winning ball counter (see FIG. 11C) is 100, 150, 200, 250. If the determined total number of winning balls has not been reached (NO in S131), the process ends. On the other hand, if the determined total number of winning balls has been reached (YES in S131), it is determined whether or not the current number of prize winning balls exceeds a reference abnormal value corresponding to the determined total winning ball number (S132). ). For example, when the value of the actual total prize ball counter reaches “100”, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize prize ball counter exceeds “7000”. If it exceeds (YES in S132), the abnormality flag is turned ON (S133), and this process is terminated. The abnormality flag indicates that the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value.

  On the other hand, if the number of winning award balls does not exceed the reference abnormal value (NO in S132), then whether the current number of consecutive award winning balls exceeds the reference abnormal value corresponding to the determined total winning ball number It is determined whether or not (S134). For example, when the value of the actual total prize ball number counter reaches “100”, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive combination prize ball number counter exceeds “6000”. If exceeded (YES in S134), the abnormality flag is turned ON (S133), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed (NO in S134), the abnormality flag is turned OFF (S135), and this process is terminated.

  [Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the seventh form shown in FIG. 103, step S2320 is provided instead of steps S2304 and S2310 of the output process (S107) of the sixth form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes special LED processing if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302). (S2330).

  [Special LED Processing] As shown in FIG. 104, in the special LED processing (S2330), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter of the special memory 89 is “3000” or more (the fluctuation count is 3000 or more). (S2720). If “3000” or more (YES in S2720), it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag is ON (S2721). If the abnormality flag is ON (YES in S2721), the rate of participation is substantially exceeding the specified value, so the blinking mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2722), This process is finished. On the other hand, if the abnormality flag is not ON (NO in S2721), the output rate does not substantially exceed the specified value, so lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2723). ), This processing is finished. On the other hand, if the value of the variation counter is less than “3000” (NO in S2720), the turn-off mode data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84, assuming that the rate of outage has not yet converged. After setting (S2724), this process is finished.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the ratio of the actual performance exceeds 70% or the continuous ratio of the performance exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 blinks from the lighting mode or the lighting mode. Switch to the mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the turnout rate knows that the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has failed or malfunctioned, or is illegally modified. Can be visually determined immediately.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to notify a substantial abnormality in the payout rate by a simple method without calculating the payout rate. That is, since the above-described output rate calculation process (S117, refer to FIG. 47) is not executed, the division control process becomes unnecessary. Instead, when the total number of winning balls reaches the predetermined total number of winning balls, an internal judgment is made as to whether the number of winning prize balls or the number of consecutive winning prizes exceeds the reference abnormal value. Just do it. As a result, it is possible for the game control microcomputer 81 to notify the abnormality of the payout rate while avoiding the complicated processing by the division (calculation of the payout rate) and the increase of the processing load.

  And according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, based on the idea that it is sufficient if the special LED 350 can be used to notify a substantial abnormality in the output rate without notifying the output rate as a numerical value. As shown, the output rate indicator 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80. That is, in terms of hardware, only one special LED 350 is mainly added on the main control board 80. Therefore, it is easy to solve the problem of securing the space on the main control board 80, and the design change from the existing pachinko gaming machine can be reduced and implemented at low cost. The other functions and effects of the seventh embodiment are substantially the same as the operations and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the seventh embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. In the seventh embodiment, even if the output rate is not calculated, it is notified whether the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value (whether it is within the normal range). On the other hand, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, whether or not the base is substantially within the normal range is notified without calculating the base.

  Also in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, special LEDs (notifying means, abnormality notifying means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80 as in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 99). The base display 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the base display process (S2340). Therefore, the drive circuit of the modified example of the seventh embodiment also has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit that displays game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 86).

  Here, a method for determining whether or not the base is outside the normal range (including whether or not the normal upper limit value is exceeded) without calculating the base will be described. For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000 (the value of the normal shot ball counter is “100”), the normal base is out of the normal range. The total number of winning balls exceeds 3900. Also, for example, when the number of shot balls in the short-time state is 2500 (the value of the short-time shot ball number counter is “25”), the short-time base is out of the normal range. The number of award balls exceeds 2457. Also, for example, when the number of shots in the jackpot gaming state is 1000 (the value of the jackpot firing ball counter is “10”), the jackpot base is out of the normal range. The total number of prize balls exceeds 8000. In this way, the total number of winning balls when the number of shot balls in each gaming state is a predetermined number of shot balls (10,000 shots, 2500 shots, 1000 shots, etc. described above) is the normal upper limit value (described above). 3900, 2457, 8000, etc.), it can be determined whether or not each base is out of the normal range at that time. Using this point, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, it is determined whether each base is substantially outside the normal range by simply determining the size at a certain timing without sequentially calculating each base.

  In addition, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, not only the total number of winning balls when the number of shot balls in each gaming state is a predetermined number of determined shot balls exceeds the normal upper limit value, Whether or not it is smaller than the normal lower limit value is also checked (see FIGS. 105A, 105B, and 105C). For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state is 10,000, if the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state is smaller than 3000, it is determined that it is out of the normal range. For example, when the number of shot balls in the short time state is 2500 and the total number of winning balls in the short time state is smaller than 2100, it is determined that the ball is out of the normal range. Further, for example, when the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state is 1000, if the total number of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state is smaller than 6000, it is determined that it is out of the normal range.

  Thus, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 stores the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), the short-time simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (B), and FIG. And a jackpot simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), the normal simple abnormality determination table includes the value of the determined number of balls to be determined in the normal gaming state and whether the normal base is within the normal range at the determination timing. The value of the total number of winning balls for determining (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value). Also, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the time-short simple abnormality determination table includes the value of the number of shot balls to be determined at the determination time in the time-short state and whether the time-base is within the normal range at the determination timing. The value of the total number of winning balls for determining (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value). Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the jackpot simple abnormality determination table includes the value of the determined number of shot balls that becomes the determination timing in the jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the jackpot base is within the normal range at the determination timing. It shows the value of the total number of winning balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for determining whether or not.

  With reference to these simple abnormality determination tables, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of shot balls in each gaming state has reached the determined number of shot balls. If the determined number of shot balls has been reached, it is determined whether the normal upper limit value is exceeded and whether it is smaller than the normal lower limit value. As a result, if the normal upper limit value is exceeded or smaller than the normal lower limit value, the base is out of the normal range, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the flashing mode. On the other hand, if it is not more than the normal upper limit value and not less than the normal lower limit value, the base is in the normal range, and the mode of the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. In the modified example of the seventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, it is assumed that the base value has not yet converged until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000 times, and the special LED 350 is turned off. To do.

  [Input Processing] In the output processing (S101) of the modified example of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 106, the steps S115, S116, S118, and S152 to S157 of the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Instead, step S191 is provided. As shown in FIG. 106, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a counter addition process (see FIG. 67) in step S151, and then executes a simple abnormality determination process described later (S191).

  [Simple Abnormality Determination Processing] As shown in FIG. 107, in the simple abnormality determination processing (S191), first, a simple abnormality determination table corresponding to the gaming state is referred to (S192). That is, in the normal gaming state, the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. If the time is short, the simple time abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (B) is referred to. If it is a jackpot gaming state, the jackpot simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (C) is referred to. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determined number of shot balls shown in the referred simple abnormality determination table has been reached (S193). For example, when referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), whether or not the value of the normal shot ball counter is “100” (the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state is 10,000 shots). Determine. If it is not the determined number of shot balls (NO in S193), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is the determined number of shot balls (YES in S193), the total number of winning balls in the corresponding gaming state is not more than the normal upper limit value and not less than the normal lower limit value shown in the simple abnormality determination table to be referred to It is determined whether or not (S194). For example, referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (A), if the value of the normal firing ball number counter is “100”, is the value of the normal total winning ball number counter 3900 or less? It is determined whether or not it is 3000 or more. If the decision result in the step S194 is NO, the abnormality flag is turned ON (S195), and this process is finished. On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S194 is YES, the abnormality flag is turned off (S196) and the process is finished.

  Note that the output process (S107) of the modified example of the seventh embodiment is the same as the output process of the seventh embodiment (see S107, FIG. 103), and thus the description thereof is omitted. Further, the special LED process (S2330) of the modified example of the seventh embodiment is the same as the special LED process (S2330, see FIG. 104) of the seventh embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the modification of the seventh embodiment, when the base is substantially out of the normal range, the special LED 350 is switched from the lighting mode (or the lighting mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base knows that the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has failed or malfunctioned, or is illegally modified. It is possible to judge visually immediately. In particular, according to the modification of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to notify a substantial base abnormality by a simple method without calculating the base. Therefore, it is possible for the game control microcomputer 81 to notify the abnormality of the base while avoiding the complicated processing by the division (base calculation) and the increase of the processing load in software. The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the above-described operational effects of the seventh embodiment, except that the output rate is changed to the base, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Eighth form>
The eighth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 performs a prize ball number counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) for measuring the total prize balls and the number of prized player action prize balls. An outgoing rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) for calculating the outgoing rate was executed. On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board (specific control board) 110 performs the award ball counter addition processing (S5104, see FIG. 112) and the payout rate calculation processing (S5105, FIG. 112). (See) is executed. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the main control board 80 receives a winning detection signal, it outputs a winning ball command (winning information) to the payout control board 110. As a result, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated action prize balls based on the inputted prize ball command, and further calculates the payout rate. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs to the main control board 80 a payout rate calculation command including information on the calculated payout rates (combination rate, continuous feature rate). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the output rate on the output rate display 300 based on the input output rate calculation command.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 80 includes a special memory 89, and the payout control board 110 includes a payout special memory 189. As described above, the special memory 89 retains its own stored contents even if the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated with the power turned on. . The special memory for payout 189 also retains its own stored contents even if the stored contents of the RAM 119 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated with the power turned on. The payout special memory 189 is a volatile storage unit (DRAM), but may be a non-volatile storage unit (EEPROM, flash, or the like).

  As shown in FIG. 109 (B), the special memory 89 according to the eighth embodiment includes a fluctuation counter, an accessory ratio storage area, a continuous accessory ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area. Unlike the special memory 89 of the form (see FIG. 11C), it does not include a counter for 100 balls, a real total prize ball number counter, a bonus prize ball counter, and a continuous prize prize ball counter. . Instead, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the payout special memory 189 of the eighth embodiment includes a counter for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball counter, a prize prize ball counter, and a continuous accessory. And a prize ball counter. 109 is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81. The prize ball counter shown in FIG. 109A is also stored in the ROM 118 of the payout control microcomputer 116. An addition table may be stored.

  [Input Process] In the input process (S101) of the eighth form shown in FIG. 110, steps S123, S140 to S142 are performed instead of steps S113 and S115 to S117 of the input process (S101) of the first form shown in FIG. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 110, when the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S123, based on the winning detection signal, the game control microcomputer 81 generates a winning ball command including information capable of determining which winning opening the gaming ball has won, The prize ball command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. Conventionally, the prize ball command only includes information on the number of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by including information that can determine which winning opening is won in the prize ball command, the payout control board 110, based on the inputted prize ball command as described later, It becomes possible to measure. In the case where it is possible to determine which winning slot has been won substantially by only information on the number of winning balls, it is possible to include only information on the number of winning balls in the winning ball command as in the conventional case.

  In the input process (S101), when the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S140, it determines whether or not a payout rate calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If not received (NO in S140), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S140), the information of the accessory ratio included in the output rate calculation command is analyzed, and the value of the accessory ratio is stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S141). ). Subsequently, the information on the continuous character ratio included in the output rate calculation command is analyzed, and the value of the continuous character ratio is stored in the continuous character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S142), and this process is finished. . Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S2301) and is in the customer waiting state (YES in S2302) is satisfied by the output process (S107) shown in FIG. If so, an exit rate display process (S2304) is executed. At this time, as described above, the value of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area or the value of the consecutive accessory ratio stored in the continuous accessory ratio storage area is displayed on the output rate indicator 300. ing.

  [Pay-out Timer Interrupt Process] The pay-out timer interrupt process is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of several msec (for example, 4 msec) is input to the payout control board 110. As shown in FIG. 111, the payout control microcomputer 116 first executes an input process to be described later (S5001). Next, based on information included in the prize ball command input from the main control board 80, a prize ball motor control process for driving the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 is executed (S5002). Next, based on the signal input from the card unit 135, a ball lending motor control process for driving the ball lending motor 131 of the lending device 130 is executed (S5003). Subsequently, an output process is executed (S5004). In the output process (S5004), a command (output rate calculation command or the like) set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 is output to the main control board 80, or a signal for driving the launch motor 113 of the launch device 112 is sent to the launch control circuit. To 111. Next, other processing is executed (S5005), and this processing ends.

  [Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 112, in the input processing (S5001), the payout control microcomputer 116 first determines whether or not a prize ball command has been received. If not received (NO in S5101), the process proceeds to step S5107. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S5101), the information included in the prize ball command (information on the number of prize balls, information that can determine which winning slot has been won) is analyzed (S5102). Next, a winning ball number setting process for setting the number of winning balls to be paid out is executed based on the analysis result of the winning ball command (S5103). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the prize ball number counter addition process similar to the prize ball number counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) described in the first embodiment is executed (S5104). In other words, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated action prize balls. Next, based on the result of the winning ball counter addition process (S5104), the same rate calculation process as the rate calculation process described in the first embodiment (S117, see FIG. 47) is executed (S5105). That is, the payout control board 110 calculates a payout rate (a combination ratio, a continuous combination ratio). Then, the output rate calculation command including the calculated output rate information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5106), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

  In step S5107, it is determined whether a prize ball detection signal is received from the prize ball sensor 122 or not. If it has been received (YES in S5107), a prize ball measurement process for measuring the number of prize balls actually paid out is executed (S5108). Next, it is determined whether or not a ball rental information signal is received from the card unit 135 (S5109). If it has been received (YES in S5109), a lent number setting process for setting the number of lent loans is executed based on the information included in the lent information information signal (S5110). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a ball rental detection signal is received from the ball rental sensor 132. If it has been received (YES in S5111), a ball rental measurement process for measuring the number of actually loaned balls is executed (S5112). Thereafter, other processing is executed (S5113), and this processing is terminated.

  As other processing (S5113), for example, if a RAM clear notification command is received from the main control board 80, the stored contents of the RAM 119 of the payout control board 110 are erased. However, even at this time, the value of the counter for 100 balls provided in the payout special memory 189 of the payout control board 110, the value of the actual total prize ball counter, the value of the winning prize ball counter, The value of the prize ball counter is not cleared. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, even when the payout control board 110 calculates the total number of winning balls and the number of bonuses to be actuated and calculates the payout rate, the payout rate is calculated as a converged value as in the first embodiment. It is possible to make it.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to check the rate by displaying the rate on the rate display 300. Further, the payout control board 110 different from the main control board 80 measures the total number of winning balls and the number of winning action award balls (the number of winning award winning balls, continuously) based on the winning ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of winning award balls). Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate without placing a measurement processing burden on the main control board 80. In particular, it is possible to measure the total number of winning balls in the payout control board 110 only by including in the winning ball command transmitted from the main control board 80 information that can be used to determine which winning ball the game ball has won. It is possible to perform the measurement of the number of prizes for actuating an action item. That is, by adding information using an existing signal line for transmitting a prize ball command, it is not necessary to cause the main control board 80 to perform measurement processing, and the burden on the main control board 80 is reduced by a simple method. It is possible.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of accessory action prize balls, and also calculate the payout rate. The main control board 80 can display the payout rate on the payout rate display 300 based on the payout rate information included in the payout rate calculation command from the payout control board 110. In this way, it is possible to display the payout rate without applying not only the measurement processing load but also the processing load of the payout rate calculation to the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). The other functions and effects of the eighth embodiment are substantially the same as the functions and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<First Modification of Eighth Form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. As shown in FIG. 113, in this first modification, the payout rate indicator 300 is arranged not on the main control board 80 but on the payout control board 110. Then, similarly to the above-described eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 (the payout control microcomputer 116) measures the total number of winning balls, measures the number of accessory action award balls, and calculates the payout rate, and further increases the payout rate. Is also displayed. Specifically, the output rate display process (S2304) as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 can be executed in the output process (S5004) of the payout-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In this first modified example, as shown in FIG. 114, since the output rate indicator is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is the drive circuit 200F of the fourth embodiment described above. Like FIG. 86, it is the same structure as the existing drive circuit which displays game information. Further, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit 200G for causing the payout rate display 300 to display the payout rate. As shown in FIG. 115, the drive circuit 200G includes a lighting selection circuit unit 230G and a lighting drive circuit unit 240G, and is connected to a rate indicator 300 arranged on the payout control board 110. The lighting selection circuit unit 230G has the same configuration as the light emission selection circuit unit 210 (see FIG. 15), and the lighting drive circuit unit 240G has the same configuration as the light emission drive circuit unit 220 (see FIG. 15). The description is omitted.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 performs the measurement of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning-work-action prize balls, and also calculates and displays the payout rate. . Therefore, it is possible to display the payout rate on the payout rate indicator 300 without applying not only the measurement processing load but also the payout calculation and display processing load to the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). is there. Since it is not necessary to provide the output rate indicator 300 and the circuit unit for displaying the output rate on the main control board 80, the main control board can be implemented with little design change. is there.

  In the eighth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the payout control board 110 performs the measurement of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning-work-action winning balls, and also calculates the payout rate. However, it may be changed as follows. In other words, the payout control board 110 performs the measurement of the total number of winning balls and the number of accessory action winning balls, and does not calculate the payout rate. Instead, the payout control board 110 receives information on the total number of winning balls (the value of the actual total winning ball number counter) and information on the number of winning action award balls (the value of the winning prize ball counter and the continuous winnings). Command including the value of the winning ball number counter) is output to the main control board 80 by the output processing of the payout-side timer interrupt processing (S5004, see FIG. 111). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the payout rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) based on the command input from the payout control board 110, and calculates the payout rate. . Then, the calculated output rate may be displayed on the output rate display 300 on the main control board 80 by executing the output rate display process (S2304, see FIGS. 54 and 55). In this way, it is possible to distribute the measurement processing burden and the calculation and display processing burden on the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80.

<Second Modification of Eighth Mode>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. In the eighth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 is allowed to count the measurement values (the total number of winning balls and the number of winning prizes for winning the action). On the other hand, in the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board 110 counts the measurement values (the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls) for calculating the base. It has become. In the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the base display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80.

  In the second modification, when the main control board 80 inputs a ball detection signal (including a detection signal from the out port sensor 16a), a prize ball command is output to the payout control board 110. However, when the main control board 80 receives a detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a as an incoming ball detection signal, a prize ball command including information that the prize ball is “0” is output to the payout control board 110. In this way, the payout control board 110 measures (counts) the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the input prize ball command, and further performs a base calculation. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs a base calculation command including information on the calculated base (normal base, time reduction base, jackpot base) to the main control board 80. As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the base on the base display 300 based on the input base calculation command.

  In the second modification, as in the eighth embodiment, the main control board 80 includes a special memory 89, and the payout control board 110 includes a payout special memory 189 (see FIG. 108). As shown in FIG. 116B, the special memory 89 of the second modification includes a normal base storage area, a time-short base storage area, a jackpot base storage area, a variation counter, and a checksum storage area. . However, unlike the special memory of the modified example of the first embodiment (see FIG. 65C), a normal 100 ball counter, a normal firing ball number counter, a normal total prize ball number counter, and a time-short 100 ball counter The short-time firing ball counter, the short-time total winning ball counter, the jackpot 100 ball counter, the jackpot firing ball counter, and the jackpot total winning ball counter are not provided. Instead, these counters are provided in the payout special memory 189 as shown in FIG. 116A is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81. The prize ball counter shown in FIG. 116A is also stored in the ROM 118 of the payout control microcomputer 116. An addition table may be stored.

  [Input Processing] The input processing (S101) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 in the second modification will be described. 117, instead of steps S112, S113, S115, S116, S151, and S152 of the input process (S101) of the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. S220 to S223 are provided. As shown in FIG. 117, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S150 that it has received the pitch detection signal, it refers to the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 116 (A) (S220). Then, based on the received ball detection signal and the winning ball number counter addition table, a winning ball command including information capable of determining which entrance the gaming ball has entered is generated, and the winning ball command Is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84 (S221). At this time, for example, if a detection signal (entrance detection signal) by the out mouth sensor 16a is received, the ingress and award balls through the out mouth 16 based on the award ball counter addition table shown in FIG. A prize ball command including information whose number is “0” is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 84. As described in the eighth embodiment, only the information on the number of prize balls may be included in the prize ball command.

  When the process proceeds to step S222 in the input process (S101), it is determined whether or not a base calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If it has not been received (NO in S222), this process ends. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S222), the base information included in the base calculation command is analyzed, the base value is stored in the storage area of the corresponding special memory 89 (S223), and the process is terminated. . That is, if the base calculation command includes normal base information, the normal base value is stored in the normal base storage area. If the base calculation command includes time-short base information, the time base information is stored. The value is stored in the time base storage area, and if the jackpot base information is included in the base operation command, the jackpot base value is stored in the jackpot base storage area. Thus, in the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S2301) and is in a customer waiting state (YES in S2302) by the output process (S107) shown in FIG. If is established, the base display process (S2340) is executed. At this time, as described in the modification of the first embodiment, the normal base value stored in the normal base storage area, the short-time base value stored in the short-time base storage area, or the jackpot base stored in the jackpot base storage area The value is displayed on the base display 300.

  [Input Processing] The input processing (S5001) executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 in the second modification will be described. 118, steps S5201 to S5206 are provided in place of steps S5101 to S5106 in the input processing (S5101) of the eighth mode shown in FIG. 112. As shown in FIG. 118, in the input process (S5001), first, the payout control microcomputer 116 determines whether or not a prize ball command is received. If not received (NO in S5201), the process proceeds to step S5107. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S5201), the information included in the prize ball command (information on the number of prize balls, information that can be identified as to which entrance has been entered) is analyzed (S5202). . Next, a winning ball number setting process for setting the winning ball number is executed based on the analysis result of the winning ball command (S5203). At this time, for example, if the ball entering the out port 16 is analyzed, the number of winning balls is set to “0” in the winning ball number setting process (S5203). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, a prize ball number counter addition process similar to the counter addition process (S151, see FIG. 67) described in the modification of the first embodiment is executed (S5204). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls. Next, based on the result of the counter addition process (S5204), the base calculation process similar to the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) described in the modification of the first embodiment is executed (S5205). That is, the payout control board 110 performs a base (normal base, time base, jackpot base) calculation. Then, the base calculation command including the calculated base information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5206), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

  As described above, according to the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 different from the main control board 80 measures the total number of shot balls and the total prize based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to display the base without placing a measurement processing burden on the main control board 80. In particular, the total number of balls to be fired in the payout control board 110 is simply included in the winning ball command transmitted from the main control board 80 by including information that can be used to determine which entrance the game ball has entered. And the total number of award balls can be measured.

  Further, according to the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 performs the measurement of the total number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls, and also performs the base calculation. The main control board 80 can display the base on the base display 300 based on the base information included in the base calculation command from the payout control board 110. In this way, it is possible to display the base without applying not only the measurement processing load but also the base calculation processing load to the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). The other effects of the second modified example are the same as the effects of the eighth embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to the base, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Third Modification of Eighth Form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third modification of the eighth form will be described. In the third modification, the base display 300 is arranged not on the main control board 80 but on the payout control board 110 (see FIG. 113). As in the second modification of the eighth embodiment described above, the payout control board 110 (the payout control microcomputer 116) performs the measurement of the total number of shot balls, the total number of winning balls, and the calculation of the base. The base is also displayed. Specifically, the base display process (S2340) as shown in FIGS. 70 to 73 can be executed in the output process (S5004) of the payout-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the third modification, since the base display is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is like the drive circuit 200F (see FIG. 86) of the fourth embodiment described above. The configuration is the same as that of an existing drive circuit that displays game information. The payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit for displaying the base on the base display 300. This drive circuit is connected to the base display 300 arranged on the payout control board 110 and has almost the same configuration as the drive circuit 200F shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 performs the measurement of the total number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls, and also performs the calculation and display of the base. Therefore, it is possible to display the base on the base display 300 without applying not only the measurement processing load but also the base calculation and display processing load to the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). Since it is not necessary to provide the base display 300 and a circuit unit for displaying the base on the main control board 80, the main control board can be implemented with little design change.

  In the second modification and the third modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, and also performs a base calculation. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, and does not perform the base calculation. Instead, the payout control board 110 includes information on the measured total number of shot balls (the sum of the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the value of the short-time shot ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot shot ball counter) and the total number of winning balls Output information of the payout-side timer interrupt process (S5004, FIG. 5), including a command including the following information (the sum of the value of the normal total prize ball counter, the hourly total prize ball counter and the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter) 111) to the main control board 80. Thus, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) based on the command input from the payout control board 110 to calculate the base. Then, the calculated base may be displayed on the base display 300 on the main control board 80 by executing the base display process (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73). In this way, it is possible to distribute the measurement processing load and the base calculation and display processing load between the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80.

<Ninth form>
A ninth form of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a lighting selection circuit unit 230 is provided, and the common signal lines B <b> 1 to B <b> 4 of the output rate indicator 300 are connected to the lighting selection circuit unit 230. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output ratio indicator 300 are connected to the light emission selection circuit unit without providing the lighting selection circuit unit 230. 210A is connected. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment, the bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC1, and the data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6 Each of D7 is input. Similarly to the first embodiment, the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC 1 are connected to the input terminals IN to IN4 of the IC 2 through the four signal transmission lines S1, respectively. Further, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC 1 are further connected. Are connected to input terminals IN5 to IN8 of IC2 through four signal transmission lines S4, respectively. And each common signal line (each lighting common line) B1-B4 of the output ratio indicator 300 is connected to the output terminals O5-O8 of IC2. The first common signal line B1 connected to the output terminal O5 of the IC2 corresponds to the “first lighting common line”, and the second common signal line B2 connected to the output terminal O6 of the IC2 is “second lighting”. Corresponds to “common wire”.

  Thus, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth form, the input terminals 5D to 8D and the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC 1 and the input terminals IN5 to IN8 and the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC 2 in the light emission selection circuit unit 210 of the first form. It is decided to use it effectively. Thereby, the light emission selection circuit unit 210A of the ninth embodiment can select the light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display device 40, and the four lighting areas 310 to 10 of the rate indicator 300. A lighting area that can be lit among 340 can be selected.

  [Game Display Process] In the game display process (S2303) of the ninth form shown in FIG. 120, step S2441 is substituted for steps S2404, S2412, S2420, and S2427 of the game display process (S2303) of the first form shown in FIG. , S2442, S2443, and S2444 are provided. As shown in FIG. 120, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [10000000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2403 (S2441). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2405). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410. The game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [01000000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2411 (S2442). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2413). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light emitting region 420.

  The game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00100000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2419 (S2443). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2421). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the third light emitting region 430. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00010000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2426 (S2444). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2428). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the fourth light emitting region 440.

  [Rate Display Process] In the ninth aspect of the ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 121, steps S2504, S2505, S2514, and S2515 of the first aspect of the ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 54 are substituted. Steps S2550, S2551, S2552, and S2553 are provided. As shown in FIG. 121, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00001000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2503 (S2550). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2551). Thereby, the lighting area which can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. The game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00000100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2513 (S2552). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2553). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320.

  In the ninth aspect of the rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 122, instead of steps S2524, S2525, S2533, and S2534 of the first rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. S2556 and S2557 are provided. As shown in FIG. 122, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00000010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2523 (S2554). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2555). Thereby, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330. The game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0... 7] = D [00000001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2532 (S2556). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2557). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

  In the ninth embodiment, the data information D [10000000], data information D [01000000], data information D [00100000], and data information D [00010000] output from the game control microcomputer 81 to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A are It corresponds to one signal. Further, data information D [00001000], data information D [00000100], data information D [00000010], and data information D [00000001] output from the game control microcomputer 81 to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A correspond to the second signal. . A state in which a light emitting region that can emit light in accordance with the first signal is selected corresponds to a game display state. A state in which a lighting region that can be lit by the second signal is selected corresponds to a rate display state (specific display state).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the first signal to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A (IC1) by the drive circuit 200A shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to display game information relating to the progress of the game on the game display 40. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the second signal to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A, the rate display state can be entered and the rate display 300 can display the rate. Thus, the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 while utilizing the existing light emission selection circuit portions (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit portions (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display 40. By switching the game information, it is possible to alternatively perform display of game information and display of the odds. That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting driving circuit unit 220X for displaying the output rate are not newly added, and the output rate display device 300 has a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to display the exit rate. In short, since there is no IC to be newly added to the existing drive circuit, the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment is easy to mount on the main control board 80. The other functions and effects of the ninth embodiment are substantially the same as the functions and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300 by replacing the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first mode with the drive circuit 200A (see FIG. 119). In contrast, the modification of the ninth embodiment is configured to display the base on the base display 300 by replacing the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment with the drive circuit 200A. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is merely a change in the output rate with respect to the operational effect of the ninth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<10th form>
The tenth pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a lighting selection circuit unit 230 is provided, and the common signal lines B <b> 1 to B <b> 4 of the output rate indicator 300 are connected to the lighting selection circuit unit 230. On the other hand, in the driving circuit 200B of the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output ratio indicator 300 are emitted from the connector CN2 without providing the lighting selection circuit unit 230. The common signal lines A <b> 1 to A <b> 4 are branched from the selection circuit unit 210. The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light emitting common line) A1 corresponds to a “first branch common line”, and from the second common signal line (second light emitting common line) A2. The branched second common signal line B2 corresponds to a “second branched common line”. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  In the drive circuit 200 </ b> B of the tenth embodiment, the light emission selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display device 40, and the four lighting areas of the rate indicator 300 A lighting region that can be lit among 310 to 340 can be selected. However, signals (common signals) output from the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC 2 are transmitted to the light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display device 40 through the common signal lines A1 to A4, and each common signal is transmitted. It transmits to each lighting area | region 310-340 of the output rate indicator 300 via line B1-B4. Therefore, the lighting area is selected at the same time as the light emitting area is selected, and the light emitting area is selected at the same time as the lighting area is selected.

  As in the first embodiment, the data signal lines Ba to Bh of the output rate indicator 300 are provided to be branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah between the connector CN2 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220, respectively. . Therefore, when displaying game information on the game display 40, the light emission mode on the game display 40 is reflected as it is on the rate display 300, and when displaying the rate on the rate display 300, The lighting mode on the rate display device 300 is reflected on the game display device 40 as it is.

  [Rate Display Process] In the tenth aspect display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 124, instead of steps S2505 and S2515 in the first form output ratio process (S2304) shown in FIG. S2561 is provided. As shown in FIG. 124, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to “H” level (S2560). Thereby, although the lighting area which can be lighted is selected as the 1st lighting area 310, the 1st light emission area 410 is also selected. In step S2514, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level. (S2561). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the second lighting area 320, but the second light emitting area 420 is also selected.

  In the tenth aspect display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. 125, steps S2562 and S2563 are provided instead of steps S2525 and S2534 in the first aspect display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 125, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to “H” level (S2562). Thereby, although the lighting area which can be lighted is selected as the 3rd lighting area 330, the 3rd light emission area 430 is also selected. In step S2533, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level. (S2563). Thereby, although the lighting area which can be lighted is selected as the 4th lighting area 340, the 4th light emission area 440 is also selected.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display process (S2303) shown in FIG. It is possible to display game information related to the progress of the game on the game display 40. If the game control microcomputer 81 executes the rate display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the game display 40 displays meaningless, but the rate display 300 displays the rate. Is possible.

  Then, according to the drive circuit 200B of the tenth embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment described above, the existing light emission selection circuit section (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit section (IC3, IC3) for performing display on the game display device 40. While using the IC 4), it is possible to alternatively perform display of game information and output rate by switching the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81. That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting driving circuit unit 220X for displaying the output rate are not newly added, and the output rate display device 300 has a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to display the exit rate.

  Here, in the tenth mode, as described above, the light emission mode when the game information is displayed on the game display 40 is reflected on the rate display 300, and the lighting mode when the rate is displayed on the rate display 300 Is reflected on the game display 40, but this is not a problem. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the display condition for displaying the rate at the rate display 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. Therefore, during the game by the player, since the gaming machine frame 50 is normally closed, game information is displayed on the game display 40. At this time, even if the light emission mode on the game display 40 is reflected in the rate display 300, there is no problem because the rate display 300 cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 50 is opened and the turnout rate is confirmed, the customer waiting state is set. At this time, even if the lighting mode on the rate indicator 300 is reflected on the game display 40, there is no problem because no game is played. The other functions and effects of the tenth embodiment are substantially the same as the functions and effects of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Modification of the tenth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, the output rate is displayed on the output rate display 300 by replacing the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first mode with the drive circuit 200B (see FIG. 123). In contrast, the modification of the tenth embodiment is configured to display the base on the base display 300 by replacing the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment with the drive circuit 200B. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is merely a change in the output rate with respect to the operational effect of the tenth embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<11th form>
The eleventh pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the data signal lines Ba to Bh of the output rate indicator 300 are connected to the data signal lines Aa to B between the connector CN <b> 2 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220. It is branched from Ah. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, a lighting drive circuit unit 240 is provided to drive the data signal lines (data lines) Ba to Bh of the output rate indicator 300 to light. The circuit unit 240 is connected. In the eleventh drive circuit 200C, the lighting drive circuit unit 240 is provided instead of the first lighting selection circuit unit 230. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  In the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output ratio indicator 300 are connected to the common signal lines A1 to A4 between the connector CN2 and the light emission selection circuit unit 210, respectively. It branches off from. Therefore, the light emission selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emitting area that can be emitted from among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display device 40 and can be turned on among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the rate indicator 300. The lighting area can be selected. The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light-emitting common line) A1 corresponds to a “first branch common line”, and from the second common signal line (second light-emitting common line) A2. The branched second common signal line B2 corresponds to a “second branched common line”.

  Based on the data information D [0... 7], the lighting drive circuit unit 240 sets eight lighting ratio lighting units in the lighting region selected by the light emission selection circuit unit 210 among the four lighting regions 310 to 340. This is a circuit for enabling lighting. The lighting drive circuit unit 240 includes a flip-flop (IC7) and a transistor array (IC8).

  IC 7 is a D-type flip-flop similar to IC 3 of the light emission drive circuit unit 220. The bus lines BL are connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC 7, and data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, and D7 are input thereto, respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC 7, respectively. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC 7. The select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC7.

  The IC 8 is a driver similar to the IC 4 of the light emission drive circuit unit 220. Eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC8. On the other hand, the data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh are connected to the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC8. These data signal lines Ba to Bh are respectively connected to eight lighting ratio lighting sections (see FIG. 13) included in the lighting areas 310 to 340 of the power ratio indicator 300 through the current limiting resistor RC.

  [Rate Display Process] In the eleventh form of the rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 127, steps S2503, S2505, S2509, S2513, S2515 of the first form of the ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIG. Instead of S2519, steps S2570, S2571, S2572, S2573, S2574, and S2575 are provided. As shown in FIG. 127, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2502, and then outputs the select signal XCSE10. The level is switched to “H” level (S2570). Thus, the lighting state in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. In step S2504, after data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2571). Thereby, although the lighting area which can be lighted is selected as the 1st lighting area 310, the 1st light emission area 410 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2572). As a result, the tenth place of the output rate (a combination ratio or a continuous combination ratio) is displayed in the selected first lighting area 310, and a lighting mode in the first lighting area 310 is selected in the selected first light emitting area 410. Will not be reflected.

  The game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 7] = D [0... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2512 and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level. (S2573). Thus, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. In step S2514, data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2574). As a result, the lighting area that can be lit is selected as the second lighting area 320, but the second light emitting area 420 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2575). Thereby, the first place of the output rate is displayed in the selected second lighting area 320, and the lighting mode in the second lighting area 320 is not reflected in the selected second light emitting area 420.

  In the eleventh aspect display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. 128, instead of steps S2523, S2525, S2529, S2532, S2534, and S2539 in the first aspect display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. S2576, S2577, S2578, S2579, S2580, S2581 are provided. As shown in FIG. 128, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2522, and then outputs the select signal XCSE10. The level is switched to “H” level (S2576). Thus, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. In step S2524, after data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2577). Thereby, although the lighting area which can be lighted is selected as the 3rd lighting area 330, the 3rd light emission area 430 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2527 or S2528, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2578). As a result, “1” or “2” is displayed in the selected third lighting region 330, and the lighting mode in the third lighting region 330 is not reflected in the selected third light emitting region 430.

  In step S2531, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] from the input / output terminals D0 to D7, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level. (S2579). Thus, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. In step S2533, after data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2580). Thereby, although the lighting area which can be lighted is selected as the 4th lighting area 340, the 4th light emission area 440 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2536 or S2537, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2581). Thereby, “0” or “1” is displayed in the selected fourth lighting region 340, and the lighting mode in the fourth lighting region 340 is not reflected in the selected fourth light emitting region 440.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display process (S2303) shown in FIG. 53, the game information related to the progress of the game is displayed on the game display 40. It is possible. Further, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the rate display process (S2304) shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the rate display 300 can display the rate. According to the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh embodiment, for the existing light emission selection circuit unit 210 (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit unit 220 (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display 40, It is possible to configure only by adding the lighting drive circuit unit 240 (IC7, IC8). That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, it is not necessary to newly add both the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting driving circuit unit 220X for displaying the output rate. Thus, according to the eleventh embodiment, display of game information and output rate can be selected with a simple circuit configuration by switching the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 and adding the lighting drive circuit unit 240. It is possible to do it unilaterally. The other operational effects of the eleventh embodiment are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Modification of the eleventh embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the drive rate 200 is displayed on the output rate display 300 by replacing the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first mode with the drive circuit 200C (see FIG. 126). In contrast, the modification of the eleventh embodiment is configured to display the base on the base display 300 by replacing the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment with the drive circuit 200C. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is merely a change in the output rate with respect to the operational effect of the eleventh aspect described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Twelfth form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a twelfth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. In the driving circuit 200 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the lighting selection circuit unit 230 includes IC5 (flip-flop) and IC6 (transistor array) as integrated circuits. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the lighting selection circuit unit 250 includes only the IC 6 as an integrated circuit. Hereinafter, a description will be given centering on differences from the first embodiment.

  A signal transmission line S11 branched from the signal transmission line S1 connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1 and the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2 is provided. The signal transmission line S11 is connected to input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC 6, respectively. Therefore, the IC 2 can transmit signals to the common signal lines A1 to A4 of the game display device 40 based on the signals output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1, and the IC6 also outputs from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1. The signal can be transmitted to the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the game display device 40 based on the received signal. However, in this case, if the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 are always in a conductive state, as in the above tenth embodiment (see FIG. 123), the light emission mode when displaying game information on the game display 40 Is reflected on the rate indicator 300, and the lighting mode when the rate is displayed on the rate indicator 300 is reflected on the game indicator 40. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the switch circuit unit 260 is provided in the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 in order to cope with the above-described problem.

  The switch circuit unit 260 can switch the signal transmission line S1 to a conductive state or a non-conductive state, and can switch the signal transmission line S11 to a conductive state or a non-conductive state. When the signal transmission line (first signal line) S1 is switched to the conductive state, the switch circuit unit 260 switches the signal transmission line (second signal line) S11 to the non-conductive state. When switching to the non-conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is switched to the conducting state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit unit 260 includes a first switch unit 261 on the signal transmission line S1 and a second switch unit 262 on the signal transmission line S11. The first switch unit 261 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR1) and a P-type MOSFET (TR11) that switch the connection state (connected or disconnected) between the output terminal 1Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of IC2. N-type MOSFET (TR2) and P-type MOSFET (TR12) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 2Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN2 of IC2, and the connection state between the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC2 N-type MOSFET (TR3) and P-type MOSFET (TR13) for switching between the N-type MOSFET (TR4) and P-type MOSFET (TR14) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC2 ), A first inverter INV1, and a second inverter INV2.

  The second switch unit 262 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR5) and a P-type MOSFET (TR15) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 1Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of IC6, and the output terminals 2Q and IC6 of IC1. N-type MOSFET (TR6) and P-type MOSFET (TR16) for switching the connection state with input terminal IN2, and N-type MOSFET (TR7) for switching the connection state between output terminal 3Q of IC1 and input terminal IN3 of IC6 And a P-type MOSFET (TR17), an N-type MOSFET (TR8) and a P-type MOSFET (TR18) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC6, and a third inverter INV3 I have.

  Specifically, in the first switch unit 261 and the second switch unit 262, the drain terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR11, TR8). TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) are connected to the source terminal, and a pull-up resistor Ra is connected to this side. On the other side, the source terminal of the N-type MOSFET and the drain terminal of the P-type MOSFET are connected.

  In the first switch unit 261, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is inverted twice by the first inverter INV1 and the second inverter INV2 at the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4). A signal is input. In the first switch section 261, a signal having a level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the first inverter INV1 is input to the gate terminals of the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14). .

  In the second switch unit 262, a signal having a level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the third inverter INV3 is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). . In the second switch unit 262, the select signal XCSE10 is input at the same level to the gate terminals of the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18).

  Thus, in the first switch unit 261 and the second switch unit 262, an “H” level signal is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). (That is, the gate voltage (gate-source voltage) becomes “L” level (voltage higher than the upper threshold voltage)) and P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). ) Is input to the gate terminal (that is, when the gate voltage becomes “L” level (voltage lower than the lower threshold voltage)), a sufficient current flows between the drain and source of each MOSFET. Begins to flow. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

  Conversely, an “L” level signal is input to the gate terminal of the N-type MOSFET (ie, the gate voltage becomes “L” level), and an “H” level signal is applied to the gate terminal of the P-type MOSFET. When a signal is input (that is, when the gate voltage becomes “H” level), a sufficient current does not flow between the drain and source of each MOSFET. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level (first level), the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3) , TR4) is input with an "H" level signal, and an "L" level signal is input to a P-type MOSFET (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14), so that the signal transmission line S1 becomes conductive. Become. At this time, in the second switch section 262, an "L" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). Since the “H” level signal is input to the signal transmission line S11, the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conductive.

  On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “L” level (second level), the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4) in the first switch unit 261. ) Is input to the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14), and the signal transmission line S1 is turned off. . At this time, in the second switch section 262, an “H” level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). Since the “L” level signal is input to the signal transmission line S11, the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

  Thus, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth embodiment, the switch circuit unit 260 is configured by a combination of two MOSFETs having different types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of communication between the game control microcomputer 81 and the IC2 and IC6. That is, since the switch circuit unit 260 is configured by combining both N-type and P-type MOSFETs, a switching operation is possible in the range from 0 V to Vcc. Therefore, the input voltage to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2 and IC6 can be easily set to a level at which the switch operates normally, as compared with the case where the switch circuit unit is configured by only one of P-type and N-type MOSFETs. It is possible.

  [Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the twelfth form shown in FIG. 131, steps S2306 and S2307 are newly provided in comparison with the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 131, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 outputs the output level of the select signal XCSE10. Is set to the “H” level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 is turned on, whereas the signal transmission line S11 is turned off. Then, a game display process is executed to display game information on the game display 40 (S2303). In contrast, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to “ Set to “L” level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 is turned off, whereas the signal transmission line S11 is turned on. Then, a rate display process is executed to display the rate on the rate display 300 (S2304).

  [Rate Display Process] In the twelfth form display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 132, instead of steps S2505 and S2515 of the first form display process (S2304) shown in FIG. S2591 is provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to “H” level (S2590). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conductive state, the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conductive state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the first lighting region 310, and the first light emitting region 410 is not selected. In step S2514, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level. (S2591). At this time as well, the signal transmission line S11 is in a conductive state, but the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conductive state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the second lighting region 320, and the second light emitting region 420 is not selected.

  133 is provided with steps S2592 and S2593 in place of steps S2525 and S2534 of the first rate display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 55. . As shown in FIG. 133, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to “H” level (S2592). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in a conductive state, the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conductive state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lit is the third lighting region 330, and the third light emitting region 430 is not selected. In step S2533, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level. (S2593). At this time as well, the signal transmission line S11 is in a conductive state, but the signal transmission line S1 is in a non-conductive state.

  Note that the game display process (S2303) of the twelfth form is the same as the game display process (S2303) of the first form shown in FIG. However, when executing the game display process (S2303) of the twelfth embodiment, as described above, the signal transmission line S1 is in a conductive state, but the signal transmission line S11 is in a non-conductive state. Contrary to (S2304), while each light emitting area 410-440 is selected, each lighting area 310-340 is not selected.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the switch circuit portion 260 is provided in the drive circuit 200D. Thereby, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level or the “L” level, so that the light emission selection circuit unit 210 selects a light emitting area that can emit light, or is turned on It is possible to switch to an output rate display state for selecting a lighting region that can be lit by the selection circuit unit 250. That is, the switch circuit unit 260 can alternatively perform display on the game display 40 and display on the rate display 300, and the display on the game display 40 as in the tenth embodiment described above. It is possible to prevent the light emission mode from being reflected on the rate display 300 and the lighting mode on the rate display 300 from being reflected on the game display 40. Other functions and effects of the twelfth embodiment are substantially the same as the functions and effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the twelfth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first embodiment is replaced with the drive circuit 200D (see FIG. 129) including the switch circuit portion 260 (see FIG. 130), and the output rate display 300 is output. The rate was displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example of the twelfth form, the drive circuit 200 of the modified example of the first form is configured to display the base on the base display 300 instead of the drive circuit 200D including the switch circuit unit 260. Has been. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is merely a change in the output rate with respect to the operational effect of the twelfth embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<13th form>
A thirteenth form of pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 137. In the first embodiment, the rate indicator 300 is provided and the rate is displayed on the rate indicator 300. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the game rate display 300 is not provided, and the game display device 40F displays the game rate. In other words, the thirteenth embodiment is characterized in that it is possible to display game information related to the progress of a game and display the rate of participation with a single display called a game display 40F. This game display device 40F is arranged on the right side of the game board 2 (a plate-like member of the game board 2), similarly to the game display device 40 of the first form (see FIG. 3). Therefore, when the game rate is displayed on the game display device 40F, it is possible to check the game rate from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 134, in the game indicator 40F of the thirteenth form, the first light emitting area 410F and the second light emitting area 420F are not so-called 7-segments, and the first indicator of the game indicator 40 of the first form. As with the light emitting area 410 and the second light emitting area 420 (see FIG. 5), the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are arranged. This is to make it difficult to determine the type of jackpot symbol in the light emission mode in the first light emitting area 410F (first special symbol display 41a) and the second light emitting region 420F (second special symbol display 41b). . On the other hand, the third light-emitting area 430F and the fourth light-emitting area 440F are so-called 7-segments, and are the same as the third light-emitting area 330 and the fourth light-emitting area 340 of the first aspect ratio indicator 300 (see FIG. 8), the game light emitting portions LA17 to LA24, LA25 to LA32 are arranged. This is because the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440 display a numerical output rate (a combination ratio, a continuous combination ratio).

  The drive circuit of the thirteenth form has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form described above (see FIG. 86). That is, a circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not newly added unlike the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment. Therefore, an existing driving circuit for displaying game information is used as it is, and the payout rate is displayed. In the thirteenth embodiment, as described above, the outgoing rate is indicated by the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F of the game display device 40F. Whether the ratio of the bonuses or the continuous bonuses is indicated by the first light emitting area 410F of the game indicator 40F, and whether the rate is the effective rate or the reference rate is the game indicator As shown by the second light emitting region 420F of 40F.

  However, as shown in FIG. 111, the first light-emitting area 410F and the second light-emitting area 420F are not so-called 7-segments, and therefore numbers are not shown. Therefore, in the 111th embodiment, if all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting area 410F are emitting light, the bonus rate is indicated. On the other hand, if all the game light-emitting portions LA1 to LA8 in the first light-emitting area 410F are not emitting light (if they are not lit), the continuous character ratio is indicated. In addition, if all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F emit light, the effective rate is indicated. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F are not emitting light (if they are not lit), the output rate as a reference value is shown.

  [Rate Display Processing] In the thirteenth aspect display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. 135, instead of steps S2504, S2505, S2514, and S2515 in the first aspect display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. Steps S3001, S3002, S3003, and S3004 are provided. As shown in FIG. 135, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0010] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3001, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to “H” level (S3001). As a result, the light emitting area that can be lit (emitted) becomes the third light emitting area 430F. Then, after executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2509). As a result, the tenth place of the output ratio (the ratio of the accessory or the ratio of the consecutive actors) is displayed in the third light emitting region 430F. In step S3003, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0001] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level. (S3004). Thereby, the light emitting area that can be lit (emitted) becomes the fourth light emitting area 440F. Then, after executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2519). Thereby, the first place of the output rate is displayed in the fourth light emitting region 440F.

  In the 13th aspect ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIG. 136, the steps S2524, S2525, S2527, S2528, S2533, S2534, S2536, and S2538 of the first aspect ratio display process (S2304) shown in FIG. Instead, steps S3005, S3006, S3007, S3008, S3009, S3010, S3011, and S3012 are provided. As shown in FIG. 136, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [1000] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3005, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to “H” level (S3006). As a result, the light emitting area that can be lit (emitted) becomes the first light emitting area 410F.

  If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), data information D [0 ... 7] = D [1 ... 1] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S3007), and the select signal XCSE1 The output level is switched to “H” level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting area 410F emit light, and the ratio displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F is an accessory ratio. It is. On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), data information D [0 ... 7] = D [0 ... 0] is output from the input / output terminals D0 to D7 (S3008), The output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting area 410F do not emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F is the continuous character ratio. Is shown.

  In step S3009, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D [0... 3] = D [0100] from the input / output terminals D0 to D3, and then switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level. (S3010). As a result, the light emitting area that can be lit (emitted) becomes the second light emitting area 420F. If the value of the actual total prize ball counter is “100” or more (YES in S2535) or the value of the variation counter is “3000” or more (YES in S2537), data information is input from the input / output terminals D0 to D7. D [0 ... 7] = D [1 ... 1] is output (S3011), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2539). Thereby, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420F emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F is an effective value. . On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball counter is less than “100” (NO in S2535) and the value of the variation counter is less than “3000” (NO in S2537), the input / output terminal D0 Data information D [0... 7] = D [0... 0] is output from .about.D7 (S3012), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2539). Accordingly, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420F do not emit light, and the output rate displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440 is a reference value. It is.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to display the winning rate using the game display 40F that displays the game information related to the progress of the game. That is, it is not necessary to newly provide a dedicated display device or an electric circuit (drive circuit) in order to display the output rate, and only a software change to the game control microcomputer 81 is required. Therefore, it is possible to display the exit rate with almost no design change from the existing pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, it is possible to prevent a very large cost and labor from being applied to the design change for displaying the output rate. Further, the game display device 40F is not arranged on the back side of the gaming machine frame 50 as in the above-described embodiments, but is arranged on the game board 2. Therefore, it is possible to visually check the payout rate displayed on the game display device 40F from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby making it easy to check the payout rate. The other operational effects of the thirteenth embodiment are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of thirteenth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the payout rate is not displayed on the game display device 40F (see FIG. 134) without providing the payout rate display 300 for displaying the payout rate. On the other hand, the modification of the thirteenth embodiment is configured to display the base on the game display 40F without providing the base display 300 for displaying the base. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134, numerical bases (normal base, time-short base, jackpot base) are displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F of the game display 40F.

  And when displaying a normal base, one game light emission part LA1 is light-emitted by the 1st light emission area | region 410F of the game indicator 40F. When displaying the time base, the two game light emitting sections LA1 and LA2 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410F of the game display 40F. When the jackpot base is displayed, the three game light emitting portions LA1, LA2, LA3 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410F of the game display device 40F. Furthermore, when displaying the base as an effective value, all the game light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 are caused to emit light in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display device 40F. On the other hand, when displaying the base as a reference value, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 are not caused to emit light (turn off) in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display device 40F. Note that the above-described light emission mode is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is merely a change in the output rate with respect to the operational effect of the thirteenth embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<14th form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first form, the display condition for displaying the rate on the rate display 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and the customer is waiting. On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, the display condition is that the RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 is operated and the customer is waiting.

  [Output Process] In the output process (S107) of the fourteenth form shown in FIG. 137, step S2314 is provided instead of step S2301 of the output process (S107) of the first form shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 137, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2314). The display flag is switched to “1” or “2” by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 as described above. If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2314) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), an exit rate display process is executed (S2304). On the other hand, if the display flag is “2” (NO in S2314) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), a game display process is executed (S2303). Although the display flag is set to “1” in the initial setting, the display flag is switched to “2” immediately after the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on. Therefore, at this time, game display processing (S2303) is performed.

  In this way, the person who confirms the payout rate waits for the customer waiting state, and if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated after opening the gaming machine frame 50, the payout rate indicator 300 can display the payout rate. Is possible. Even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated except when the power is turned on, the information stored in the game RAM 84 is not cleared. In the fourteenth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the display of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not switched by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152, but every predetermined time (for example, one minute). In addition, the display of the feature ratio and the display of the continuous feature ratio are automatically switched.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourteenth form, it is possible to display the rate of return only when it is desired to check the rate of return by operating the RAM clear switch 152. Normally, the RAM clear switch 152 is operated only when the power is turned on. Therefore, according to the fourteenth aspect, in consideration of the fact that the design change becomes large if an operation means for displaying the output rate is newly provided in the main control board 80 or other parts, the existing one that is not used after power-on is used. The RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used. Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily display the exit rate while reducing the design change. The other operational effects of the fourteenth embodiment are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of the 14th form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modification of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourteenth embodiment, the display condition for displaying the rate on the rate display 300 is that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and the customer is waiting. On the other hand, in the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, the display condition for displaying the base on the base display 300 is that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and the customer is waiting. .

  [Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 138, in the output processing (S107) of the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, step S2350 is substituted for step S2301 of the output processing (S107) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 138, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is “1” (S2314). In the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, unlike the modification of the first embodiment described above, the display flag is switched to “1” or “2” by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152. If the display flag is “1” (YES in S2350) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), base display processing is executed (S2340). On the other hand, if the display flag is “2” (NO in S2340) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), game display processing is executed (S2303). Although the display flag is set to “1” in the initial setting, the display flag is switched to “2” immediately after the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on.

  In this way, the person who confirms the base can wait for the customer waiting state, open the gaming machine frame 50, and then operate the RAM clear switch 152 to display the base on the base display 300. . In the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, unlike the modification of the first embodiment, the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 does not switch between the normal base display, the short-time base display, and the jackpot base display. The normal base display, the short time base display, and the jackpot base display are automatically switched every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

  As described above, according to the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, it is possible to display the base only when it is desired to confirm the base by operating the RAM clear switch 152. In particular, if an operation means for displaying the base is newly provided in the main control board 80 or other parts, the design change becomes large. It is possible to display the base arbitrarily while reducing the design change. The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the above-described operational effects of the fourteenth embodiment, but the detailed description is omitted.

<Other variations>
In each of the above embodiments and the modifications thereof, the gaming machine frame 50 opens the display condition for displaying the rate on the rate display 300 or the display condition for displaying the base on the base display 300. It is also assumed that the customer is waiting, or the RAM clear switch 152 is operated and the customer is waiting. However, the display conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, only the gaming machine frame 50 is opened, the customer is waiting, or the RAM clear switch 152 is operated, or the gaming machine frame 50 is opened and the customer is waiting. The RAM clear switch 152 may be operated. Further, a new switch (operation means) may be provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 50 and the switch may be operated as a display condition. The display condition may be that a specific operation (for example, an operation in a certain setting screen) is performed with the effect button 63 or the select button 64 (operation means).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments and modifications thereof, the light emission selection circuit units 210 and 210A are configured to include two integrated circuits (IC1 and IC2). However, the light emission selection circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the light emission drive circuit unit 220 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC3 and IC4). However, the light emission drive circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs. The lighting selection circuit unit 230 includes two integrated circuits (IC5 and IC6), and the lighting selection circuit unit 250 includes one integrated circuit (IC6). However, the lighting selection circuit unit may be configured to include three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the lighting drive circuit unit 240 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC7 and IC8). However, the lighting drive circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, the thing by which each light emission part LA1-LA32 for games is arrange | positioned as shown in FIG. However, the game display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game display may be one in which each light emitting unit is arranged as shown in FIG. The game display may be a so-called quadruple 7-segment as shown in FIG. In this case, as described in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to indicate the rate and base as numerical values when the rate is displayed on the game display (4 stations 7 segments).

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, the game indicator 40 light-emitted corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 commons x 8 (N = 8) bits. However, for example, only the first light emitting area 410 and the second light emitting area 420 may be provided, and light may be emitted corresponding to 2 common × 8 bits in total 16 bits. Alternatively, it may emit light corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 commons × 4 (N = 4) bits, and the number of light emitting regions and the number of light emitting portions that can emit light in each light emitting region (natural number N). Can be appropriately changed.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, as shown in FIG. 7, what is called a quadruple 7 segment was used as the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300. However, the output rate indicator or the base indicator 300 is not limited to the quadruple 7-segment, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the rate indicator or the base indicator may be one in which each lighting unit is arranged instead of each game light emitting unit LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. 134, and each game light emitting unit LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. Instead of, each lighting unit may be arranged. However, if the rate indicator or base indicator is not a 7-segment type as shown in FIG. 5, the rate or base cannot be shown as a numerical value. In this case, for example, the number of lighting parts that are lit in the first lighting region indicates the tenth of the output rate or base, and if eight lighting parts are blinking, the ratio of the output rate or the tenth of the base is determined. It is assumed that it is “9”. In addition, the number of lighting parts that are lit in the second lighting area indicates the first place of the output rate or the base. If the eight lighting parts for lighting rate are blinking, the first place of the output rate is “9”. I will be there. In this way, only the person who confirms the output rate or the base may know the display (output rate, base) on the output rate display or the base display using a manual or the like.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, the output rate display 300 or the base display was lit corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 commons × 8 (N = 8) bits. However, for example, only the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 may be provided, and lighting may be performed corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 commons × 8 bits. Alternatively, lighting may be performed corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 commons × 4 (N = 4) bits. The number of lighting areas and the number of lighting parts that can be lit in each lighting area (natural number N) Can be appropriately changed.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments and the modifications thereof, the number (8) of the light emitting units provided in one light emitting area of the game display 40 and the one lighting area of the rate indicator 300 or the base display 300 are provided. The number of lighting parts (8) is the same. However, the number of light emitting units provided in one light emitting region may be different from the number of lighting units provided in one lighting region. Moreover, in each said form and its modification, the number (4) of the light emission area | region with which the game display device 40 is provided, and the number (4) of the lighting area | region with which the rate display device 300 or the base display device 300 is provided were the same. . However, the number of light emitting areas and the number of lighting areas may be different.

  Further, in each of the above-described forms and the modifications thereof, the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 of the output ratio display 300 display the output ratio (a combination ratio or a continuous combination ratio). The base (normal base, short-time base or jackpot base) is displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. However, the lighting area for displaying the output rate or the base can be changed as appropriate. For example, the output rate or the base may be displayed in the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340. In addition, the tenth and first places are displayed as a percentage display for the output rate, the normal base, or the time base. However, even if it is 60%, for example, “0.60” may be displayed together with the decimal point. Alternatively, only the tens place may be displayed by using the percentage, normal rate, or short-time base as a percentage display. In this way, it is possible to display only one lighting area. In this case, it is preferable to round off the first place. In addition, the first and second lighting areas 310 and 320 may display the ratio of the actors, and the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340 may display the consecutive actor ratios, and vice versa. You may do it. Also, for the jackpot base, the decimal point may be displayed together, or only the hundreds may be displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described forms and modifications thereof, since it is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute a jackpot game but does not execute a jackpot game, FIG. 11 (A), FIG. 65 (A), FIG. 109 (A) The total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated action prize balls were measured using the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. However, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can also execute a small hit game, it is only necessary to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated prize balls using the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. In other words, when the game ball wins the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 by executing the small hit game, the value of the counter for 100 balls and the value of the prize winning ball counter are set to “15”. However, it is only necessary to prevent the value of the consecutive feature prize ball counter from increasing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the 100-ball counter and the actual total prize-ball counter are used in order to measure the total number of winning balls as a denominator for calculating the payout rate as one in units of one hundred balls. However, the total number of prize balls may be measured as one in units other than one hundred, for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Alternatively, the total number of winning balls may be measured in units of one ball using only one counter, called the total winning ball number counter. In this case, when calculating the ratio of the winning combination, it is sufficient to divide the value of the total winning ball number counter measured in units of one ball with respect to the value of the winning prize ball counter and multiply by 100, When calculating the bonus rate, the value of the total prize ball counter measured in units of one ball may be divided by 100 and multiplied by 100 with respect to the value of the consecutive bonus prize counter.

  Further, in the modified examples of the above embodiments, in order to measure the number of fired balls as a denominator for calculating the normal base as one in units of one hundred balls, a normal 100 ball counter and a normal shot ball number counter are used. It was. In addition, in order to measure the number of fired spheres as a denominator for calculating the time-short base as one per hundred balls, a time-short 100-ball counter and a time-short-shot ball number counter were used. Also, in order to measure the number of fired balls as a denominator for calculating the jackpot base as one in units of one hundred balls, a jackpot 100 counter and a jackpot fired ball counter were used. However, the number of shot balls may be measured as one in units other than one hundred balls. For example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Further, the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the short-time state, and the number of shot balls in the big hit game state may be measured in units of one ball using one counter. In this case, for example, when the normal base is calculated, the value of the counter measured in units of one ball may be divided by 100 with respect to the value of the normal total winning ball counter.

  Moreover, in the modification of each said form, it divided | segmented for every game state called a normal game state, a time-short state, and a jackpot game state, and calculated and displayed the base (normal base, time-short base, jackpot base). However, the range for dividing the base can be changed as appropriate. For example, a base other than the jackpot gaming state and a base in the jackpot gaming state may be calculated and displayed. In addition, a base that considers all states from when the power is turned on to the present time may be calculated and displayed without being divided by game state. Alternatively, a base limited only to a specific state (for example, a short time state) may be calculated and displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the total number of winning balls and the total number of shot balls are measured from the time when power is first turned on (predetermined start time). However, the above-mentioned predetermined start time can be changed as appropriate, for example, even from a specific date and time (January 1, 2017), or when a hall employee starts a specific setting. good.

  In the first embodiment, if the total number of winning balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the exit rate is a reference value. It was. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340 to indicate that the exit rate is an effective value. However, if the total number of winning balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 do not display the rate (that is, the reference rate is not displayed). If the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320 may display the winning rate. In this case, it is possible for the person who confirms the rate of return to determine that the rate is as a value that has converged to some extent (rate as an effective value) on the condition that the rate is displayed. is there.

  In the first embodiment, the winning rate is an effective value if either one of the first condition that the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more is satisfied. Showed that. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the output rate may be an effective value. In addition, only one of the first condition and the second condition may be provided to indicate whether or not the output rate is an effective value. In the case where only the first condition is provided, the output rate is displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. In addition, when only the second condition is provided, the output rate is displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. In addition, if the time from when the power is first turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is measured and the third condition that the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, the payout rate is an effective value. You may make it show. Moreover, you may make it show that an output rate is an effective value on the conditions which combined suitably among 1st conditions, 2nd conditions, and 3rd conditions.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in order to determine that the winning rate is an effective value that has converged to some extent, it is determined whether or not the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more (predetermined value) or the number of fluctuations is 3000 times ( It was determined whether or not it was equal to or greater than a predetermined number of revolutions). However, the value of the total number of winning balls and the value of the predetermined number of revolutions can be changed as appropriate. For example, whether or not the total number of winning balls is 30000 (predetermined number of winning balls) or the number of fluctuations is determined. It may be determined whether or not it is 10,000 times (predetermined number of rotations) or more.

  Moreover, in the said 1st form, in order to alert | report that an output rate is an effective value, "1" (specific number) was displayed on the 4th lighting area | region 340. FIG. However, the specific number for notifying that it is an effective value is not limited to “1”, and may be “7” and can be changed as appropriate. Also, it is not always necessary to display numbers in order to notify that the output rate is an effective value. For example, if “-” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, it may be notified that the output rate is an effective value. Further, it may be notified in the lighting areas other than the fourth lighting area 340 that the output rate is an effective value, and can be changed as appropriate.

  Moreover, in the said 1st form, the output rate was alert | reported by displaying the output rate on the output rate display 300. FIG. However, the output rate may be notified by outputting sound indicating the output rate from the speaker (sound output means) 67. In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated output rate information to the sub-control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the output rate information. Control (voice control) will be performed. Note that, based on the establishment of the display condition described above, the output rate may be displayed on the output rate display 300, and a sound indicating the output rate may be output from the speaker 67, or the sound indicating the output rate from the speaker 67. May be output only.

  Moreover, in the said 1st form, it alert | reported that the output rate was an effective value by the display with the output rate display 300. FIG. However, the notification that the output rate is an effective value can be changed as appropriate. For example, specific display is performed on the image display device 7 or the sub liquid crystal display device, light emitting means such as the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light in a specific light emission mode, or a specific notification sound is output from the speaker 67. Thus, it may be notified that the output rate is an effective value.

  In the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the rate on the rate display 300 are alternatively performed. However, for example, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the drive circuit 200X can be configured to display game information on the game display device 40 and display the game rate on the game rate display device 300 at the same time. You may do it.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the game control state is set, that is, the control process (specific control process) related to the change display of the special symbol or the control process (specific control process) during the control of the big hit game state is executed. When it is, the output rate is not calculated (the output rate calculation process (S117, see FIG. 45) is not executed). However, when the output rate is not calculated, it can be appropriately changed. For example, when the control process (specific control process) during the control in the short time state is being executed, the output rate may not be calculated. . Further, for example, the payout rate may not be calculated until the total number of winning balls reaches a specific number.

  Moreover, in the said 1st form, it was made possible to measure the total number of winning balls as one hundred balls using a counter for 100 balls and an actual total winning ball number counter. However, in order to measure the total number of winning balls as one unit of one hundred balls, it is not necessary to use two counters (a counter for 100 balls, an actual total winning ball number counter), and it can be changed as appropriate. For example, by using only the total prize ball counter that measures the total number of prize balls in units of one ball and dividing the value of the total prize ball number counter by 100, the value with one hundred ball units is measured. Anyway. “Measurement” means to grasp the quantity for a certain purpose.

  In the modification of the first embodiment, if the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 and the base is a reference value. showed that. On the other hand, if the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 to indicate that the base is an effective value. However, if the total number of shot balls is less than 100,000 shots and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000 times, the base is not displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 (that is, the base as a reference value is not shown), If the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the base may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. In this case, it is possible for the person who confirms the base to determine that the base is a value converged to some extent (a base as an effective value) on the condition that the base is displayed.

  Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the base is an effective value if either the first condition that the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more is satisfied. It showed that. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it may be indicated that the base is an effective value. Further, only one of the first condition and the second condition may be provided to indicate whether or not the base is an effective value. When only the first condition is provided, the base is displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. When only the second condition is provided, the base is displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. Further, if the time from when the power is first turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is measured and the third condition that the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, the base is an effective value. You may make it show. In addition, the base may be an effective value under a condition appropriately combined from the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition.

  Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, in order to determine that the base is an effective value that has converged to some extent, it is determined whether the total number of shot balls is 100,000 shots (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000. It was determined whether the number of rotations (predetermined number of rotations) or more. However, the value of the total number of shot balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is determined whether the total number of shot balls is 300000 shots (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 10,000 times. It may be determined whether or not (predetermined number of revolutions) or more.

  Moreover, in the modification of the said 1st form, in order to alert | report that a base is an effective value, "1" (specific number) was displayed on the 4th lighting area | region 340. FIG. However, the specific number for notifying that it is an effective value is not limited to “1”, and may be “7” and can be changed as appropriate. In order to notify that the base is an effective value, it is not always necessary to display a number. For example, if “-” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, it may be notified that the base is an effective value. Further, the fact that the base is an effective value may be notified in a lighting region other than the fourth lighting region 340, and can be changed as appropriate.

  Further, in the modification of the first embodiment, the base is notified by displaying the base on the base display 300. However, the base may be notified by outputting sound indicating the base from the speaker (sound output means) 67. In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated base information to the sub-control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the base information ( Voice control). Based on the establishment of the above display conditions, the base display 300 may display the base and output the sound indicating the base from the speaker 67, or output only the sound indicating the base from the speaker 67. You may do it.

  Moreover, in the modification of the said 1st form, it alert | reported that the base was an effective value by the display on the base indicator 300. FIG. However, the notification that the base is an effective value can be changed as appropriate. For example, specific display is performed on the image display device 7 or the sub liquid crystal display device, light emitting means such as the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light in a specific light emission mode, or a specific notification sound is output from the speaker 67. Thus, it may be notified that the base is an effective value.

  In the modification of the first embodiment, the game information display on the game display 40 and the base display on the base display 300 are alternatively performed. However, for example, as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, the drive circuit 200X is configured so that display of game information on the game display 40 and display of the base on the base display 300 can be executed simultaneously. May be.

  Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, when in the game control state, that is, control processing related to the special symbol variation display (specific control processing) or control processing during control of the jackpot gaming state (specific control processing) Is not calculated (the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 66) is not executed). However, when the base is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, the base may not be calculated when a control process (a specific control process) during the control in the short time state is being executed. Further, for example, the base may not be calculated until the total number of shot balls reaches a specific number.

  In the modification of the first embodiment, for example, a normal 100 ball counter and a normal shot ball number counter are used so that the number of shot balls in the normal game state can be measured as one unit of one hundred balls. However, in order to measure the number of shot balls in the normal game state as one unit of one hundred balls, it is not necessary to use two counters (normally 100 ball counter, normal shot ball number counter) and can be changed as appropriate. It is. For example, a value obtained by dividing the value of the normal firing ball number counter by 100 using only the normal firing ball number counter that measures the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state in units of one ball, so that one hundred ball units is one. May be measured. Note that the number of shot balls in the short-time state or the number of shot balls in the big hit gaming state may be measured by dividing by 100 using only a counter that measures in units of one ball.

  In the first embodiment, the rate is displayed, and in the modification of the first embodiment, the base is displayed. However, the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of the modification may be combined so that both the base and the output rate can be displayed. In this case, both the base and the output rate may be displayed at the same time on one display (display means), or the output rate and the base may be displayed alternatively. Alternatively, the base and the output rate may be displayed separately on two separate displays.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, the output ratio display 300 or the base display 300 is used as the main control board 80 (see FIG. 6), the rear side cases 401A to 401D of the main board cases 400A to 400D (FIGS. 80 to 83). ), Disposed on the dispensing control board 110 (FIG. 113). However, the arrangement location of the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is not limited to the above-described location, and can be appropriately changed as long as the visibility of the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80 is not hindered. For example, as shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be disposed on a transparent central cover 55 located at the rearmost position. In this case, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 arranged in the central cover 55 may be connected to the connector CN5 of the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC5. The central cover 55 is attached to the gaming machine frame 50 and protects various control boards and the back unit of the gaming board 2 from the rear.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd form and each modification, as shown in FIGS. 80-83, by moving (rotating or sliding) back side case 401A-401D, the output ratio display 300 or the base display 300 is made. Moved. However, you may change as follows.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 142, a rectangular notch 401a is formed on the left side of the rear case 401E of the main board case 400E. Columnar shaft members 401b and 401c extending in the vertical direction are provided on the left and right sides of the notch 401a. Cylindrical portions 300a and 300b provided at the left and right ends of the rate indicator 300 are inserted through the shaft members 401b and 401c so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC6, and the notch 401a, the shaft members 401b and 401c, and the cylindrical portions 300a and 300b are connected to the moving mechanism portion. It corresponds to. In this way, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is arranged below the notch 401a in the normal time, as shown in FIG. 142 (A). However, at this time, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC10 (see FIG. 142 (B)) located in front of the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is poor. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the visibility of the integrated circuit IC10 can be ensured by sliding the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 upward with respect to the rear case 401E. . With this configuration, it is possible to move the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 without moving the rear case 401E. In addition to the modification shown in FIG. 142, the rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be slid in the left-right direction or rotated without moving the rear case.

  Moreover, in the 2nd modification of the said 3rd form, and the 3rd modification, the rate indicator 300 was moved to the left-right direction or the up-down direction. However, if the integrated circuit mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be easily seen, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable in the front-rear direction. Then, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable in any two or more of the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the front-rear direction.

  In the second modification and the third modification of the third embodiment, the output rate indicator 300 is slid in parallel with the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. That is, the output rate indicator 300 was slid in a direction orthogonal to the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a. However, the projection display 300 or the base display 300 may be slid so as not to be parallel to the mounting surface 80a as long as it intersects the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd form and its each modification, the non-opposing position (FIG.80 (C), FIG.81 (C), FIG.81C) where the output ratio display 300 or the base display 300 does not oppose the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. 82 (B) and 83 (B)). However, as shown in FIG. 142, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved only within a range facing the mounting surface 80a. Further, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved slightly within a range not facing the mounting surface 80a.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd form and each modification, it was comprised so that the output ratio display 300 or the base display 300 could be moved with respect to the main control board (predetermined member) 80. FIG. However, it can be changed as appropriate to which member the rate indicator or base indicator 300 can be moved. For example, the rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is arranged in the payout substrate case 500 (see FIG. 7), and the rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is moved with respect to the payout control substrate (predetermined member) 110. You may comprise so that it can.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd form and each modification, it comprised so that the output rate display 300 or the base display 300 could rotate or slide. However, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved by a method other than rotation or slide. For example, the rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is attached to an urging mechanism (moving mechanism unit) including a spring member, and the rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is pressed against the urging force of the spring member. Accordingly, the output rate indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd form and its 1st modification, as shown in FIG.80 and FIG.81, the output rate indicator 300 was moved (rotated) to the area | region which does not oppose the mounting surface 80a. However, the ratio display 300 may be moved (rotated or slid, etc.) so that the area facing the mounting surface 80a becomes small in a range where the ratio display 300 faces the mounting surface 80a. In this case, for example, the output ratio indicator 300 is moved from a position facing the portion where the integrated circuits are mounted on the mounting surface 80a to a position facing the portion where the integrated circuits are not mounted so much on the mounting surface 80a. You may make it move. The base display 300 may be moved as described above.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated at the time of turning on the power and the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated at the time of power interruption are collated to check each checksum. If so, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are retained, and if the checksums do not match, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased. However, if the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 calculated when the power is interrupted, it is estimated that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct, and the special memory 89 The stored contents of are retained. On the other hand, if the checksums do not match, the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased by assuming that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are incorrect. In this way, it is possible to omit the process of calculating and checking the checksum of the special memory 89. That is, it is possible to easily check whether or not the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct by using the conventional checksum calculation and verification of the game RAM 84. As a specific process, the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 143 may be executed instead of the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, if the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on does not match the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is cut off, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased. I made it. However, the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased by a special operation on the operation means (for example, by holding down the RAM clear switch 152 for 10 seconds when the power is turned on). That is, an operation means for erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are provided as separate storage means. However, as shown in FIG. 144, a single gaming RAM 84a having both a storage area (game area) provided in the gaming RAM 84 and a storage area (special area) provided in the special memory 89 may be provided. In this case, when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the game area are erased, but the stored contents of the special area are not erased. The game area checksum and the special area checksum are calculated separately, and the stored contents of the special area are held or erased based on the checksum of the special area. Also good. Alternatively, the entire checksum including the game area and the special area may be calculated, and the stored contents of the special area may be retained or erased based on the checksum verification.

  In the first embodiment, a checksum is used as an error detection code to be calculated to determine whether the stored contents of the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are normal. However, the error detection code is not limited to the checksum and can be changed as appropriate. For example, by obtaining a parity bit (error detection code) of “0” or “1” in order to maintain the overall odd-evenness of binary data, collating the data to which the parity bit is added It may be determined whether the stored content is normal.

  Moreover, in the said 1st form, the calculation of a winning rate was simplified by dividing the total prize-ball number by the value which measured one hundred-ball unit as one with respect to the number of prize-operated action prize balls. However, the method for simplifying the calculation of the output rate is not limited to the above method, and for example, the following method may be used.

  In other words, a bonus actuated prize ball counter capable of measuring, for example, 32-bit (first bit range) information of award actuated prize ball number (award prize prize ball number or continuous feature award ball number) and a total prize ball A total prize ball counter capable of measuring the number as, for example, 32-bit information is prepared. When calculating the payout rate, first, of the 32-bit information measured by the total winning ball counter, a digit that is “1”, which is a significant figure, is searched for from the upper digit. Next, for example, information of 16 bits (second bit range) is extracted from the digit (significant digit) where the significant digit is found. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of winning balls is created. Subsequently, information corresponding to the 16-bit digit of the total number of prize balls created is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the accessory act prize ball counter. For example, when the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter, the 32-bit information measured by the accessory act prize ball counter Among the information, information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information on the number of winning action prize balls is created. Then, the payout rate is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information of the number of prize-operating action balls by the 16-bit information of the total number of winning balls. With this method, it is possible to easily calculate the output rate (reduce the processing load) by dividing by 16 bits of information without dividing by 32 bits of information. And, if the 16-bit information is simply extracted from the most significant digit, the error from the correct rate will be large when the number of award balls is relatively small, such as 1000 shots. Since this method is a method of extracting 16-bit information from significant digits, it has a relatively large total number of winning balls such as 100,000 shots and a relatively small total number of winning balls such as 1,000 shots. However, it is possible to reduce the error from the correct output rate value.

  Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, by dividing the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the value obtained by measuring the number of firing balls in the normal gaming state as one unit of one hundred balls, Simplified base calculation. However, the method of simplifying the base calculation is not limited to the method described above, and for example, the following method may be used.

  In other words, a total prize ball counter capable of measuring the total number of winning balls as, for example, 32-bit (first bit range) information, and a total ball number counter capable of measuring the total number of fired balls as, for example, 32-bit information. prepare. When calculating the base, first, of the 32-bit information measured by the total number of shot balls counter, a digit that is “1”, which is a significant digit, is searched from the upper digit. Next, for example, information of 16 bits (second bit range) is extracted from the digit (significant digit) where the significant digit is found. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of shot balls is created. Subsequently, from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball number counter, information corresponding to the created 16-bit digit of the total number of shot balls is extracted. For example, when the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total shot ball counter, the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter is Among them, information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of winning balls is created. Then, the base is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information of the total number of winning balls by the 16-bit information of the total number of shot balls. With this method, it is possible to simplify the base calculation (reduce the processing load) by dividing by 16 bits of information without dividing by 32 bits of information. And if it is a method of extracting only 16 bits of information from the most significant digit, the error from the correct base value becomes large when the number of shot balls is relatively small like 1000 shots, Since this method is a method of extracting 16-bit information from effective digits, even if there are a relatively large total number of shot balls such as 100,000 shots or a relatively small total number of shot balls such as 1,000 shots. It is possible to reduce the error from the correct base value.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the display rate display measurement values (total number of winning balls, number of winning action award balls) stored in the game RAM 84A and the special memory 89A are stored. The output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is compared with the measured output rate display value (S027). The value was transferred to the gaming RAM 84A (S026). However, if the values of the measured values for display of the respective winning rates do not match, the measured values for displaying the winning rate stored in the game RAM 84A are reset and the measured for displaying the winning rate stored in the special memory 89A. The value may be reset. Alternatively, without performing the above-described collation, when the power is turned on, the output rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A may be transferred to the gaming RAM 84A. In addition, in the modified example of the second embodiment, it is of course possible to carry out by replacing the above-mentioned measurement rate display measurement value with the base display measurement value.

  In the fourth embodiment and its modification, an external display device (external output display device 900 or external base display device 900) is attached to a connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80, and the external display device is provided. It is now possible to display the rate of participation or base. However, the connection portion for attaching the external display device may be provided in a portion other than the main control board 80, and may be provided in the payout control board 110, the game board 2, and the gaming machine frame 50, for example. Further, the structure of the connection portion is not limited to the connector, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the fourth embodiment, the output rate or base is displayed on the external display device attached to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80. However, the external display device does not display the output rate or the base, but the output rate (composition ratio, continuous feature ratio) or base (normal base, short-time base, jackpot base) is within the normal range depending on the mode of the light emitting means, etc. You may make it alert | report only whether it exists.

  Moreover, in the said 6th form and 7th form, and those modifications, if a rate or base is in a normal range, special LED350 will be made into a lighting mode (1st mode), and a rate or base will be out of a normal range. If so, the special LED 350 is set in a blinking mode (second mode). However, the mode of the special LED 350 can be changed as appropriate. If the output rate or base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is turned on or off, or if the output rate or base is outside the normal range, the special LED 350 is turned on. You may make it a mode and a light extinction mode. Further, when it is determined that the exit rate or base is out of the normal range, the main control board 80 may stop the game control (main control main process). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing any more games. Also, if it is determined that the output rate or base is out of the normal range, an abnormal signal is sent from an external terminal board provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an external device (for example, a data counter) other than the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may make it output. Thereby, it is possible for the external device that has input the abnormality signal to perform abnormality notification at the output rate or the base.

  In the sixth embodiment, the winning rate exceeds the predetermined value after satisfying the precondition that the total number of winning balls is 10,000 (predetermined number of winning balls) or the number of fluctuations is 3000 (predetermined number of rotations) or more. Then, the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode. However, the above-mentioned preconditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, the precondition that the total number of winning balls is 30,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 10,000 or more may be used. That is, the value of the predetermined number of winning balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be changed as appropriate. The value of the predetermined number of winning balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations are not set at the time of manufacturing the pachinko gaming machine 1, but may be arbitrarily set by an operation of a hall (game hall) employee, for example. good. Further, only the precondition that the total number of winning balls is 10,000 or more, or the precondition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more may be used. Alternatively, it may be assumed that the total number of winning balls is 10,000 (predetermined number of winning balls) or more and the number of fluctuations is 3000 (predetermined number of rotations) or more. Moreover, you may make it not provide a precondition.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments and their modifications, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is arranged on the main control board 80. . However, the location of the special LED 350 is not limited to the main control board 80 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special LED 350 may be disposed on the payout control board 110. In this case, the main control board 80 sends the result of the payout ratio (combination ratio, continuous winning ratio) or base (normal base, time base, jackpot base) to the payout control board 110 as a command. As a result, the CPU of the payout control board 110 determines whether or not the payout rate is within the normal range based on the reception of the command, and determines whether or not the base is within the normal range. The payout control microcomputer 116 may change the light emission mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. In this way, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform the abnormality determination of the outage rate or the base abnormality, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81.

  Alternatively, the special LED 350 may be arranged on an effect control board such as the sub control board 90. In this case, for example, the output rate or base result is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 as a command. As a result, the production control microcomputer 91 performs an abnormality determination of the output rate or an abnormality determination of the base based on the command. Then, the production control microcomputer 91 may change the light emission mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. In this way, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform the abnormality determination of the outage rate or the base abnormality, it is possible to reduce the burden of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81.

  Moreover, in the said 6th form and 7th form, and those modifications, special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 which shows whether the output rate and a base are abnormal is newly provided, but existing light emission Means (frame lamp 66 or panel lamp 5) may be used to indicate whether the output rate or base is abnormal. Further, the abnormality notification means for indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is not limited to the light emitting means, but may be the image display device 7 (display means) or the speaker 67 (sound output means). When the abnormality notification means is the image display device 7, it is only necessary to show that the output rate or base is abnormal by displaying a special image on the image display device 7. Further, when the abnormality notifying means is the speaker 67, it is only necessary to show that the output rate and the base are abnormal by outputting special sound from the speaker 67.

  Moreover, in the said 6th form, the regulation value (70%, 60%) for judging that the output rate has become abnormal can be changed suitably. Further, in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, a range in which the base is determined to be within the normal range (30% to 39% for the normal base, 84% to 99% for the time base, 600% for the jackpot base) ˜800%) can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, in the said 7th form, each value of the simple abnormality determination table (refer FIG. 100) for determining that the output rate is substantially abnormal can also be changed suitably. In the modification of the seventh embodiment, each value of each simple abnormality determination table (see FIGS. 105 (A), (B), and (C)) for determining that the base is substantially abnormal is also used. It can be changed as appropriate.

  In the modified example of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the value of the number of shot balls (determined number of shot balls) when determining whether or not the total number of winning balls exceeds the normal upper limit value, The value of the number of fired balls when determining whether or not the number of prize balls is smaller than the normal lower limit value (the number of determined fired balls) was the same. However, the number of shot balls when determining whether the total number of winning balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the number of shot balls when determining whether the total number of winning balls is smaller than the normal lower limit value May be set to be different from each other. Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, both the size determination whether or not the total number of winning balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the size determination whether or not the total number of winning balls is smaller than the normal lower limit value are performed. Although it went, it is good also as only either one.

  In the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of winning balls and the number of winning action prize balls based on the winning ball command (entry information) transmitted from the main control board 80. However, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated prize balls based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command. In this case, the above-described command includes information that can determine which winning opening has been won. In addition, the winning information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 because the gaming ball has won the winning opening, and is not limited to the winning timing of the gaming ball, but is transmitted at any timing after the winning timing. You may make it.

  In the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the prize ball command (entrance information) transmitted from the main control board 80. However, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command. In this case, the above-mentioned command includes information capable of determining which entrance into the entrance. In addition, the entry information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 because the game ball has entered the entrance, and is not limited to the entry timing of the game ball. It may be transmitted at the timing.

  In the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated action balls. However, the control board other than the payout control board 110 may be caused to measure the total number of winning balls and the number of winning action prize balls. For example, the main control board 80 transmits to the sub-control board 90 a command capable of discriminating the winning winning opening, and the production control microcomputer 91 determines the total number of winning balls and the number of winning action action balls based on the command. In addition to performing measurement, the output rate is calculated. The sub control board 90 transmits a command indicating the calculation result of the output rate to the image control board 100 so that the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the output rate on the image display device (display unit) 7. good. In this way, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the game control microcomputer 81. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a new display device called the rate display 300, it is possible to easily display the rate.

  In short, the process for measuring the total number of winning balls and the number of winning action award balls (award ball number counter addition process (S114)) and the process for calculating the payout rate (outgoing rate calculation process (S117)) Further, the process for displaying the output rate (output rate display process (S2304)) may be executed by different control boards, and the combination thereof can be changed as appropriate.

  In the modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is made to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. However, control boards other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls. For example, the main control board 80 transmits to the sub-control board 90 a command capable of discriminating the entered entrance, and the production control microcomputer 91 determines the total number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls based on the command. Performs measurement and base calculation. Then, the sub control board 90 may transmit a command indicating the calculation result of the base to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may display the base on the image display device (display unit) 7. In this way, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the game control microcomputer 81. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a new display device called the base display device 300, it is possible to easily display the base.

  In short, the process for measuring the total number of shot balls and the total number of winning balls (counter addition process (S151)), the process for calculating the base (base calculation process (S152)), and for displaying the base These processes (base display process (S2340)) may be executed by separate control boards, and the combination thereof can be changed as appropriate.

  In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit portion 260 is configured by combining both N-type and P-type MOSFETs. However, if it is possible to switch between the game display state and the percentage display state, or switch between the game display state and the base display state, the configuration of the switch circuit unit can be changed as appropriate. For example, the switch circuit unit may be configured with either an N-type MOSFET or a P-type MOSFET. Further, the switch circuit unit may be configured using other types of transistors such as JFETs without using MOSFETs.

  In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the output level (“L” level or “H” level) of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 has been described as appropriate. However, the above-described select signal XCSE0 can be changed by changing the drive circuit. , XCSE1 and XCSE10 can be implemented differently from the output level. The output levels of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 are set in the output process (S107) (output rate display process (S2304), game display process (S2303), base display process (S2340)). The microcomputer 81 may be executed as a function provided in advance and not executed as output processing (S107).

  In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 stores the programs stored in the ROM 83 (the rate calculation process (S117), the rate display process (S2304), the base display process ( Based on S2340) etc., the calculation of the exit rate, the display of the exit rate, the calculation of the base, and the display of the base were executed. However, a ROM separate from the ROM 83 that stores the program (main control main process) related to the progress of the game is provided, and the rate calculation, rate display, base calculation, and base display are executed in another ROM. May be stored. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 may perform a rate calculation, a rate display, a base calculation, and a base display based on a program stored in a ROM different from the ROM 83.

  Moreover, in each said form, it was made to be able to display on the rate display 300 both the rate of a rate and a rate of a continuous rate. However, it is also possible to display only one of the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio on the rate display 300.

  Moreover, in the modification of each said form, the number of balls entered to each winning opening (the 1st starting opening 20, the 2nd starting opening 21, the 1st large winning opening 30, the 2nd large winning opening 35, the normal winning opening 27) is shown. The total number of shot balls was counted by counting the number of balls entering the out port 16 as well as counting. However, the total number of shot balls may be counted as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the out port discharge path HK extends from the out port 16 to the outside of the game area 3, and the first start port discharge path H1 extends from the first start port 20 to the outside of the game area 3. 2 The second start port discharge path H 2 extends from the start port 21 to the outside of the game area 3, and the first big prize port discharge path H 3 extends from the first big prize port 30 to the outside of the game area 3, so that the second large A second big prize port discharge path H4 extends from the winning hole 35 to the outside of the game area 3, and a normal prize port discharge path H5 extends from the normal prize port 27 to the outside of the game area 3. These discharge paths HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5 all communicate with the total discharge path HX. The total discharge path HX is provided with a discharge port sensor 16b that can detect game balls flowing in from the discharge paths HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5. A detection signal from the discharge port sensor 16b is input to the main control board 80. Thus, by counting the detection by the total discharge port sensor 16b, the number of all game balls discharged out of the game area 3 can be counted. That is, the total number of fired balls can be counted.

  In addition, instead of the total discharge port sensor 16b that can detect the game balls flowing in from all the above-described discharge paths HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5, a part of the discharge paths (for example, the discharge paths HK, H1) , H2), the total number of fired balls may be counted using a discharge port sensor capable of detecting game balls flowing in from H2. In addition, a sensor that can directly detect a game ball that is emitted toward the game area 3 is provided without using a method of counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 3 (for example, near the rail member 4). A sensor may be provided) to count the total number of fired balls.

  Further, in each of the above-mentioned forms and modifications thereof, a display rate (specific rate value) that is a ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-operated action balls is displayed, or the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the total number of fired balls The base (specific ratio value) is displayed. However, the specific ratio value is not limited to the output ratio or the base, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a ratio between a certain first specific game ball number and a certain second specific game ball number. For example, as a specific ratio value, a ratio between the number of balls entered into the first starting port 20 (first specific game ball number) and the number of balls entered into the first big winning port 30 (second specific game ball number). Or the ratio of the number of balls entering the first starting port 20 (first specific game ball number) and the number of balls entering the second starting port 21 (second specific game ball number). It may be a ratio of the number of balls entered into the winning opening 27 (first specific game ball number) and the number of balls entered into all winning ports (second specific game ball number). Further, for example, an out ratio value (specific ratio value) that is a ratio between the total number of winning balls and the number of out balls (number of specific game balls) may be displayed. The number of out balls is the number of game balls that have entered the out port 16 without winning any of the winning ports. In the out ratio value, if the value of the total number of winning balls is abnormally large with respect to the number of out balls, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can give an unfair privilege to the player, and there is an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction. It can be determined that it has occurred. On the other hand, if the value of the total number of winning balls is abnormally small with respect to the number of out balls, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has too few privileges that can be given to the player, and an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. It is possible to judge. In addition, instead of the out ratio value that is the ratio between the total number of winning balls and the number of out balls, an out ratio value that is the ratio of the number of winning and out balls to a specific winning opening is displayed. Also good.

  Moreover, in the modification of each said form, the base unrelated to time was calculated and displayed. However, the base at a predetermined time may be calculated and displayed. For example, the base (short-time payout rate) in one hour may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the base in one hour exceeds 300%, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. Further, for example, a base for 10 hours (medium-time payout rate) may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the base at 10 hours is smaller than 50% or larger than 200%, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, although the rate or base was displayed, as shown below, you may make it display the value (specific index value) used as the parameter | index for judging abnormality of a gaming machine. . For example, the number of winnings (specific index value) for each winning opening per predetermined time (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first large winning opening 30, second large winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27). May be displayed. In this case, if the number of prizes received at a particular prize opening is extremely large or small compared to the number of prizes received at other prize openings, it may be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. Is possible. Alternatively, only the total number of winning balls (the number of payout balls) may be displayed. In this case, for example, a person who sees the total number of prize balls per minute calculates a base for the total number of shot balls (about 60 shots per minute), and determines an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction. You may do it. Alternatively, only the number of out balls may be displayed. In this case, for example, if the number of out balls per minute (predetermined time) greatly exceeds 60 balls, or if the number of out balls per minute is extremely small, unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction occurs. It is possible to judge that

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, it was decided to acquire four random numbers, such as a jackpot random number, as a random number (entrance information) acquired based on the winning to the 1st starting port 20 or the 2nd starting port 21 However, it is also possible to acquire one random number and determine whether or not the jackpot is large, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of variation pattern based on the random number. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of random numbers acquired based on the start winning and what is determined in each random number.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, although comprised as what is called V probability machine (game machine controlled to a high probability state based on passage of the specific area 39), it changes to a high probability state based on the kind of winning jackpot symbol It may be configured as a gaming machine for which the transition is determined. Further, in each of the above embodiments, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a gaming machine with a certain number of times of change of probability). However, once controlled to a high probability state, the gaming machine ( You may comprise as what is called a probability variation loop type game machine.

  Moreover, in each said form and its modification, it comprised so that the fluctuation | variation of special figure 2 might be performed with priority over the fluctuation | variation of special figure 1. FIG. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation of special figure 2 and the fluctuation | variation of special figure 1 may be performed according to the winning order to a start opening. In this case, a storage area that can be stored by adding the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is provided in the game RAM 84, and the entry information is stored in the storage area in accordance with the winning order, and the storage order is old. It can be configured to digest from Further, it may be configured such that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be executed even during the fluctuation of the special figure 2, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be executed even during the fluctuation of the special figure 1. That is, you may comprise as a game machine which performs what is called simultaneous fluctuation. Moreover, you may comprise as what is called 1 type 2 type | mold mixing machine or a honey-type game machine. That is, the present invention can be suitably applied to gaming machines having various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the gaming machine.

  Of course, it is possible to carry out by combining the features of the above-described embodiments and the features of the modified examples, or by removing some of them.

12 Inventions Shown in the Embodiments The inventions of the following means are shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the component of each invention is not limited to this supplementary note.

The invention according to means 1
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A specific indicator (outgoing rate, base) that can display a specific ratio value (outgoing rate, base) that is the ratio of the total number of prize balls won by the player and the number of specific gaming balls (the number of bonuses for action of action, the total number of shot balls) Rate indicator 300, base indicator 300),
A gaming machine comprising: a moving mechanism (rear case 401A, rotating pins P1, P2) that enables the specific indicator to move relative to a predetermined member (main control board 80).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to confirm the specific ratio value by displaying the specific ratio value on the specific display. Furthermore, since the specific display can be moved by the moving mechanism unit, for example, it is possible to make the specific display easy to see or to make the portion hidden by the specific display visible.

The invention according to means 2
In the gaming machine described in means 1,
The predetermined member is a main control board capable of executing a control process related to the progress of the game,
The main control board includes a mounting surface (80a) for mounting a predetermined integrated circuit (IC9),
The specific indicator is a gaming machine that is movable with respect to the mounting surface by the moving mechanism unit (see FIGS. 80 to 83 and 142).

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a portion that cannot be seen on the mounting surface of the main control board by moving the specific indicator with respect to the mounting surface of the main control board.

The invention according to means 3 is
In the gaming machine described in means 2,
The specific indicator is opposed to the integrated circuit by the moving mechanism (see FIGS. 80A, 81A, 82A, 83A, and 142A). ) To a non-opposing position that does not face the integrated circuit (see FIGS. 80C, 81C, 82B, 83B, and 142). It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the predetermined integrated circuit mounted on the main control board is difficult to see by the specific display, the specific display is moved to the non-facing position, thereby It is possible to ensure the visibility.

The invention according to means 4 is
In the gaming machine described in means 3,
The non-facing position is a position where the specific indicator does not face the entire mounting surface (see FIGS. 80C, 81C, 82B, and 83B). It is a featured gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface is ensured by moving the specific indicator to a non-facing position that does not face the entire mounting surface of the main control board. It is possible to be in a state of being.

The invention according to means 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to means 4,
The moving mechanism unit is configured to allow the specific indicator to slide in a direction (left-right direction, up-down direction) intersecting the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface (see FIGS. 82, 83, and 142). It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to easily realize a structure that avoids the generation of a portion that cannot be seen on the mounting surface of the main control board by sliding the specific display.

The invention according to means 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to means 4,
The moving mechanism unit is configured to make the specific display movable so that a region of the mounting surface facing the specific display becomes small (see FIGS. 80 and 81). It is a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, it is possible to make the mounting surface easily visible by moving the specific indicator so that the hard-to-see parts of the mounting surface are gradually reduced.

The invention according to means 7
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The specific indicator has, as the specific ratio value, a base that is a ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of shot balls that is the number of game balls fired by the player (normal base, time base, This is a gaming machine that can display a jackpot base.

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration, it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine has a failure or a malfunction by confirming the base displayed on the specific display, even if it is an employee of the game hall. Can be done.

The invention according to means 8 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7,
The specific indicator has, as the specific ratio value, a payout ratio (composition ratio, continuous characteristic ratio) that is a ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of the combination out of the total prize balls acquired by the player. ) Can be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration, it is easy to check whether the difference is greatly different from the reference value (60% or 70%) that has been cleared when inspected in advance by confirming the exit rate displayed on the specific display. It is possible to judge.

  In this specification, “establishment of a predetermined control condition” means that a big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, and the jackpot symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed. It is.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 80 ... Main control board 80a ... Mounting surface 81 ... Microcomputer 300 for game control ... Output ratio display, base display 300a, 300b ... Cylindrical part 400A-400E ... Main board case 401A-401E ... Back side case 401a ... notches 401b, 401c ... shaft member IC9 ... integrated circuit

Claims (8)

In a gaming machine that controls to a special gaming state advantageous to a player based on establishment of a predetermined control condition,
A specific indicator capable of displaying a specific ratio value which is a ratio of the total number of winning balls and the specific number of game balls acquired by the player;
A game machine comprising: a moving mechanism section that enables the specific indicator to move relative to a predetermined member. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined member is a main control board capable of executing a control process related to the progress of the game,
The main control board includes a mounting surface for mounting a predetermined integrated circuit,
The game machine characterized in that the specific indicator is movable with respect to the mounting surface by the moving mechanism section. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific indicator can be moved from a facing position facing the integrated circuit to a non-facing position not facing the integrated circuit by the moving mechanism section. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
The non-facing position is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific indicator does not face the entire mounting surface. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the moving mechanism unit is configured to allow the specific indicator to slide in a direction intersecting an orthogonal axis of the mounting surface. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the moving mechanism unit is configured to move the specific display so that a region of the mounting surface facing the specific display becomes small. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The specific indicator can display, as the specific ratio value, a base which is a ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player with respect to the number of shot balls which is the number of game balls fired by the player. A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The specific indicator is capable of displaying, as the specific ratio value, a payout ratio that is a ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of a role out of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player. A featured gaming machine.

Images